Puntos Debiles Actualizados 25 Junio2018

Heads Operation and
Maintenance Manual, Volume I

of II
Reference: InTouch Content ID 3012542
Version: 4.0
Release Date: 23-Mar-2018
EDMS UID: 275261732
Produced: 23-Mar-2018 04:07:36

Owner: HCS Sustaining Engineering
Author: Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo
Private Heads
Copyright © 2018 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Legal Information
Legal Information

HCS Sustaining Engineering\Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo\InTouch Content ID 3012542\4.0\Release Date:23-Mar-2018\EDMS UID: 275261732\Produced: 23-Mar-2018 04:07:36
This work contains the confidential and proprietary trade secrets of Schlumberger
and may not be copied or stored in an information retrieval system, transferred,
used, distributed, translated or retransmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, in whole or in part, without the express written
permission of the copyright owner.
Trademarks & Service marks
Schlumberger, the Schlumberger logotype, and other words or symbols used

to identify the products and services described herein are either trademarks,
trade names or service marks of Schlumberger and its licensors, or are the
property of their respective owners. These marks may not be copied, imitated
or used, in whole or in part, without the express prior written permission of
Schlumberger. In addition, covers, page headers, custom graphics, icons, and
other design elements may be service marks, trademarks, and/or trade dress
of Schlumberger, and may not be copied, imitated, or used, in whole or in part,
without the express prior written permission of Schlumberger.
A complete list of Schlumberger marks may be viewed at the Schlumberger

Oilfield Services Marks page: http://markslist.slb.com
Private
Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Document Control
Document Control
Owner: HCS Sustaining Engineering
Author: Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo
Reviewer: Brian Philpott
Approver: Mike Ramsey
Contact Information
Name: HCS Sustaining Engineering
LDAP Alias: intouch-hcs-wl-doc
Revision History
Version Date Description Prepared by
4.0 23-Mar-2018 Per ticket 7131358, removed references of ST Author: Toby Syrus, T. Kumar
and QT from Tables 5-13 through 5-16.
3.13 27-Oct-2017 Per ticket 7093645, changed the title Sections Author: Toby Syrus, Naomi
5.10.5 and 5.10.5.1. Hotta
3.12 15-Feb-2017 Per ticket 6973484, updated Table 4–4. Author: Rodrigo Munoz, Naomi
Hotta
3.11 15-Feb-2016 Per InTouch ticket 6786703: updated quality Author: B. Philpott, J. Singh
note in sections 3.1.1: Monocable Heads
Specifications, 3.2: Perforating Equipment
Heads’ 3.2.4: PEH-EF/ EFA, 3.3.1: Logging
Equipment Heads Specifications, and 8.1:
General Description.
3.10 18-Jan-2016 Per InTouch ticket 6755053: Restructured Author: Brian Philpott, T. Kumar
tables and added InTouch ID 6656337 in
Appendix Z (Weakpoint) of Vol.II.
3.9 23-Oct-2015 Remove Table 7-1, Cone Rope Socket Data Author: Brian Philpott
Sheet
3.8 01-Oct-2015 Per InTouch ticket 6659728: Revised the Author: B. Philpott,
manual per the comments from SME (added SMatukumalli, T. Kumar
PN 101043054). Per InTouch ticket 6715262:
Removed BCC selection and assembly
procedure and added reference to SWI
in section 6. Per InTouch ticket 6715418:
Added Tech Alerts 6573104 and 6561420
to appendices in Vol II. Per InTouch ticket
6733227: Changed back-up ring PN from
T5011464 to 101522856 for LEH-PT.
3.7 06-Apr-2015 In sections 4.17.1 and 4.17.3 change part Author: Brian Philpott, Vinay
number for fishing bell from 101060917 to Patel
1010627902. In sections 4.21.1 and 4.21.2
change extension rod part number from
101061520 to 101595831.
3.6 23-Mar-2015 Added note to Section 7, Cone Type Rope Author: Brian Philpott
Socket Assembly.
Private
3.5 07-Jan-2015 Add Tech Alert # 6520265 to appendices in Author: Brian Philpott
Vol II. Add footnote to table Y-7, Vol II. Refer to
InTouch content # 6588887 for assembly and

disassembly of the LEH-QT (Section 4.20).
3.4 17-Sep-2014 Replace steel boot H207930 with 101608481 Author: Barry Albert Lumankun
for 7-52 and 7-53 cables (ticket 6541140).
3.3 09-Sep-2014 Revise table 5-1, Head Maintenance Author: Brian Philpott
Frequencies and add definition of job to the
table. Remove table 5-2 Special conditions
for heads. Revise Weakpoint Maintenance,
section 8.6.
3.2 27-Aug-2014 Add reference to tech alert in section 4.19.2. Author: Brian Philpott
Add tech alert reference to part number
100459196 in table Y-7. Add tech alert
reference to part number H122757, Table 6-3.
Revise Table 3-1 footnote for MH22.
3.1 10-Jun-2014 Added specifications for PEK-E, PEK-F and Author: Brian Philpott
PEK-BE to table 3-6. Revise LEH-HT wet/dry
load cell data, section 3.3.3. Added Tech Alert
5980444 to appendices. Added reference to
Tech Alert 5980444, “BCC female boot PN
H400313 stamped TH400313 found defective”
in Table 6-4 and 6-5. Removed assembly and
disassembly of MH22 and referenced SWI
at InTouch #: 6245550. Revise figure 4-18,
“PEH-EF/EFA disassembly” to show boot
retainer (#6298658). Removed section 4.5,
PEH-EF. Added new section 5.7, PEK-BD,
PEK-BE and PEK-F. Removed PEH-EF
from 5.7.1 FIT-1 table and 5.7.2, FIT-2 table.
Revise text in section 3.1.2 to match table 3-1.
Remove rope socket assembly instructions
and link to Rope Socket Assembly SWI.
Revised section “Cone Type Rope Socket
Assembly.”
3.0 18-Apr-2013 Manual split into two volumes and major Author: Brian Philpott
updates per InTouch tickets 5764894, 5947994
& 5799321.
2.0 28-Dec-2011 General Revision. Author: Brian Philpott
1.16 24-Jan-2011 Correct Figure C-9, LEH-MT loadcell assembly Author: Noor Ali Momi, Stacy
(Feedback #: 5330567). Incorporate Ticket #: Henley
5376536, color of wire. Add an appendix for
Tech Alerts. Revise rope socket data for 7–52
cable in Table 8-1.
1.15 13-Aug-2010 Add new section 8.3.12, Crimping Data. Author: Noor Ali Momin
Add new step 7 to section 9.2.4, Weakpoint
mainteannce.
1.14 13-May-2010 Retitled section 7.7.1 and revised spelling Author: Noor Ali Momin
error in table 5.1 for “Release Device Option”.
Private
1.13 05-Feb-2010 Revise table 7–5, “Previously offered cable Author: Noor Ali Momin
types and outer conductor insulation diameters”
to remove cables E057566 and H142548.

Update BOM's for LEH-AA/HT/MT/QT/V,
MH-22/32, PEH-AB/EF/L/BB/E.Resolve
Feedback #: 4944507, 4941931, 4943544,
4959730. Remove appendix for LEH-V
(obsoleted). Replace the term “Horizon” with
“MaxWell.” Replace “IPC” with “HCS.” Add
LEH-PT. Replace reference to AMS with
HTCS. Add appendix for LEH-QE.
1.12 12-Oct-2009 Revise Table U-3, part 100212113 rating from Author: Shyann Roy
2000-4000 to 2000-2400 (Ticket #: 4898229).
1.11 16-Sep-2009 Revise LEH-QT FIT-2 Electrical, step 1, Author: Shyann Roy
resistance on wet and dry load cell (ticket #:
4810837). Update BOMs and drawings.
1.10 08-Dec-2008 Revise electrical FIT check for LEH-ST, section Author: Noor Ali Momin,
5.6.5.2, step 1. Corrected formula in Example Brandon Martin
1, section 9.2.1. Revise FIT-2 for LEH-MT
(Feedback #: 4799377).
1.9 22-Oct-2008 Lengthen the head and hook-up wires for the Author: Noor Ali Momin
LEH tools (sections 5.4.6 and 5.6.3.2). Added
drawing 100370886, Logging Heads Wire
Assembly Set, to Appendix “C.”
1.8 18-Jun-2008 Revise LEH-QT disassembly, section 5.4.4 Author: Ezequiel Saavedra,
(InTouch ticket #: 4377285). Revise PEH-E Chet Ramesh Nigel Lewis
and PEF-EF lower head H122373. Add new
section 9.2.2 Spider weakpoint temperature
corrections.
1.7 28-Mar-2008 Correct typo in Section 6.1. Clarified the Author:

use of DC-200 when installing boots (ticket#:
4376473). Revise LEH-ST shop calibration
(ticket #: 4473662).
1.6 11-Jul-2007 Revised LEH-ST FIT-1 and TRIM Author: Juan Real Paredes
requirements.
1.5 26-Apr-2007 Revise Kalrez rated temp, table 7-2. Add Author: Juan Real Paredes
PEK-E BOM. Revise LEH-AA, LEH-QT,
LEH-ST, PEH-EF, PEK-BB, PEH-E BOMs and
dwgs.
1.4 22-Mar-2007 Add torque wrench B034859 to section 3.2.4.2 Author: Juan Real Paredes
Fishing head and rope socket assembly, step
7 per ticket #: 3844771.
1.3 27-Nov-2006 Remove reference to obsoleted equipment Author: Wireline InTouch

ECRD-B.
1.2 31-Oct-2006 Revise cable electrical and mechanical Author: Scott Carson
properties table.
1.1 10-Jun-2005 Replace section 7.10 Boot Selection with Author: Stephen Fishman
content from WRM, Section 4.14.4, Boot
Selection. Retained graphics from Heads
manual, replaced text and tables from
WRM.Added LEH-AA.
1.0 18-Sep-2004 Update manual and transfer to XML format. Author: InTouch
Private
Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Regulatory Compliance
Regulatory Compliance
Waste management
IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THE EQUIPMENT
This symbol means that the equipment cannot be discarded in a rubbish-bin. At
its end of life, the equipment and/or its components must be treated, following
Schlumberger Environmental procedures, in compliance with Schlumberger QHSE
Policy and applicable laws and regulations on waste management.
Private
Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Forward
Forward
This version of the document completely replaces any other version, published
or unpublished. Users should check that the version they are using matches
the controlled version published in InTouch. Document version information
is indicated on the document cover page. To confirm the correct version is
in use, the user checks that the reference version, release date, EDMS UID
and production date and time all match those on the controlled version of the
document. Refer to the document control page for the document revision history.
Private
viii Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Table of Contents viii
Table of Contents
Regulatory Compliance __________________________________________ vi
Forward _________________________________________________________ vii
1 Introduction ___________________________________________________ 1-1
2 Health, Safety & Environment __________________________________ 2-1

2.1 Personnel Safety ____________________________________________ 2-1
2.2 Equipment Safety ____________________________________________ 2-1
2.3 Compliance with European Union Technical Directives _________ 2-2
3 General Descriptions and Specifications _______________________ 3-1

3.1 Monocable Heads ____________________________________________ 3-1
3.2 Perforating Equipment Heads ________________________________ 3-13
3.3 Logging Equipment Heads __________________________________ 3-25
4 Operations, Disassembly and Assembly _______________________ 4-1

4.1 MH-22 ______________________________________________________ 4-1
4.2 MH-32 ______________________________________________________ 4-5
4.3 PEH-AB _____________________________________________________ 4-6
4.4 PEH-E _____________________________________________________ 4-17
4.5 PEH-EFA ___________________________________________________ 4-21
4.6 PEH-KD ____________________________________________________ 4-23
4.7 PEH-L _____________________________________________________ 4-23
4.8 PEK-BB ___________________________________________________ 4-23
4.9 PEK-BC ____________________________________________________ 4-25
4.10 PEK-BD ____________________________________________________ 4-26
4.11 PEK-BE ____________________________________________________ 4-28
4.12 PEK-E _____________________________________________________ 4-30
4.13 PEK-F _____________________________________________________ 4-30
4.14 LEH-AA ____________________________________________________ 4-32
4.15 LEH-HT ____________________________________________________ 4-37
4.16 LEH-MT ____________________________________________________ 4-43
4.17 LEH-PT ____________________________________________________ 4-49
4.18 LEH-QC ____________________________________________________ 4-90
4.19 LEH-QE ___________________________________________________ 4-103
4.20 LEH-QT ___________________________________________________ 4-104
4.21 LEH-ST ___________________________________________________ 4-110
4.22 LEH-QO ___________________________________________________ 4-132
4.23 LEH-RC ___________________________________________________ 4-132
4.24 Hook-up Wire Installation for the ECRD _____________________ 4-132
Private
ix Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Table of Contents ix
4.25 Fishing ____________________________________________________ 4-135
5 Maintenance ___________________________________________________ 5-1

5.1 General Information __________________________________________ 5-1
5.2 O-ring Practices _____________________________________________ 5-2

5.3 Lubrication Guidelines ________________________________________ 5-3
5.4 Worn Parts Replacement Guidelines __________________________ 5-6
5.5 Monocable Heads ____________________________________________ 5-8
5.6 PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E ___________________________________ 5-11
5.7 PEK-BD, PEK-BE, PEK-F ___________________________________ 5-15
5.8 Perforating Equipment Heads ________________________________ 5-15
5.9 PEH-EFA ___________________________________________________ 5-19
5.10 Logging Equipment Heads __________________________________ 5-20
6 Bridle Cable Connectors (BCC) _________________________________ 6-1
7 Cone Type Rope Socket Assembly _____________________________ 7-1
8 Weakpoints ____________________________________________________ 8-1

8.1 General Description __________________________________________ 8-1
8.2 Weakpoint Selection _________________________________________ 8-4
8.3 Weakpoint Breaking Strength and Maximum Safe Pull __________ 8-6
8.4 Weakpoint Temperature Corrections __________________________ 8-7
8.5 Weakpoint Operations ________________________________________ 8-9
8.6 Weakpoint Maintenance ______________________________________ 8-9
Private
x Heads ORM and MM Volume I / List of Figures x
List of Figures
3-1 MH-22 - H030796 _________________________________________________ 3-4

3-2 HTHP, 1-3/8 in, Monocable Lower Head (H395896) __________________ 3-6
3-3 MH-32 Assembly (H353637) _______________________________________ 3-8
3-4 HTHP, 1-11/16-in, monocable lower head (H395895)________________ 3-10
3-5 AH-38, H106437 _________________________________________________ 3-12
3-6 PEH-EF - 101043054, previously H713120 _________________________ 3-19
3-7 PEH-E to PEH-EF Conversion_____________________________________ 3-20
3-8 Conversion of the PEK-E for PEH-EF Head ________________________ 3-23
3-9 Conversion of PEK-BB to PEH-EF/ EFA Head ______________________ 3-24
3-10 Conversion of the PEK-BC for PEH-EF/ EFA Head _________________ 3-25
3-11 Dry Load Cell Assembly - 100323783 ______________________________ 3-37
4-1 Disassembly of the MH-22 - H030796_______________________________ 4-2
4-2 Modular weakpoint assembly (PEH-AB) with connector installed _____ 4-10
4-3 Adjusting the connector gap _______________________________________ 4-11
4-4 Installing plastic feedthrough connectors ___________________________ 4-12
4-5 Long boot retainer (100593948) on BCC Make-Up __________________ 4-14
4-6 Long boot retainer (100593948) on BCC make-up __________________ 4-20
4-7 PEH-EFA Disassembly - 101043054 _______________________________ 4-22
4-8 Conversion of PEK-BB to PEH-EF/ EFA Head ______________________ 4-25
4-9 Lower head sub-assembly ________________________________________ 4-34
4-10 Assembled lower head and RTD___________________________________ 4-35
4-11 Assembly of lower head housing___________________________________ 4-37
4-12 Bulkhead disassembly ____________________________________________ 4-53
4-13 Disassembly of loadcell assembly _________________________________ 4-54
4-14 Disassembly of piston (H352065) __________________________________ 4-55
4-15 Bulkhead to head adapter, T5013553 ______________________________ 4-58
4-16 Bulkhead to head adapter wiring (100507408) ______________________ 4-59
4-17 Inserting insulator (T5013555) into insulator adapter (T5013554) ____ 4-60
4-18 Bulkhead adapter assembly _______________________________________ 4-61
4-19 Bulkhead assembly (T5013553) ___________________________________ 4-62
4-20 Strain element (H356842) _________________________________________ 4-63
4-21 Loadcell length after TDC stand operations_________________________ 4-64
4-22 Strain element cable preparation __________________________________ 4-64
4-23 Strain element wiring diagram _____________________________________ 4-65
4-24 Loadcell cable assembly __________________________________________ 4-66
4-25 5-pin feed-thru____________________________________________________ 4-67
4-26 Installing the 5 pin feed-thru and retaining ring ______________________ 4-67
4-27 Piston (H352065) _________________________________________________ 4-68
4-28 Loadcell assembly ________________________________________________ 4-69
4-29 Filling the loadcell with oil _________________________________________ 4-70
4-30 Lower adapter (T5013558) O-rings ________________________________ 4-72
4-31 Fishing bell (H351343) ___________________________________________ 4-72
4-32 Weakpoint assembly______________________________________________ 4-73
4-33 Wiring diagram, 100507408 _______________________________________ 4-74
Private
xi Heads ORM and MM Volume I / List of Figures xi
4-34 Installing the feed-thru (T5011962)_________________________________ 4-75

4-36 Assembly of RTD seals - O-ring (B041754) and back-up ring
(101522856) _____________________________________________________ 4-76
4-37 Bulkhead assembly with RTD seals installed - external view _________ 4-77
4-38 Assembly fitted into the downhole end of the tool ___________________ 4-77
4-40 Loadcell alignment into lower 31-pin head __________________________ 4-78
4-41 Assembling the weakpoing assembly onto the loadcell assembly ____ 4-79
4-42 Routing head leads through the weakpoint assembly________________ 4-80
4-43 Adjusting the length of the head leads______________________________ 4-80
4-44 Alignment key on weakpoint assembly and fishing bell ______________ 4-81
4-45 Installing the fishing bell extension (H701908) ______________________ 4-82
4-46 Installing plastic feedthrough connectors ___________________________ 4-94
4-47 Long boot retainer (100593948) on BCC Make-Up __________________ 4-95
4-48 Head with weakpoint and leads installed ___________________________ 4-97
4-49 Loadcell (100353269) mounting in head (H701315) ________________ 4-109
4-50 H351340, Lower Head Assembly _________________________________ 4-113
4-51 Loadcell Assembly (H351342) ____________________________________ 4-115
4-52 Installing plastic feedthrough connectors __________________________ 4-118
4-53 Long boot retainer (100593948) on BCC Make-Up _________________ 4-120
4-54 Head with weakpoint and leads installed __________________________ 4-121
4-55 Improper routing of hook-up wires around the ECRD _______________ 4-133
4-56 Place marks on the ECRD indicating thermometer housing location _ 4-134
4-57 Positioning hook-up wires on the ECRD ___________________________ 4-134
4-58 The industry standard fishing neck appears after upper housing is pulled with
the weakpoint (PEH-E/EF/L/KD) __________________________________ 4-136
4-59 Outer housing pulled off when the weakpoint is broken in LEHs (example
LEH-PT) ________________________________________________________ 4-136
5-1 O-ring position (from Parker O-ring Handbook) ______________________ 5-3
5-2 LEH-QT shop calibration setup ____________________________________ 5-28
5-3 LEH-QT Calibration Chart _________________________________________ 5-30
5-4 LEH-PT shop calibration setup ____________________________________ 5-32
5-5 LEH-PT Calibration Chart _________________________________________ 5-33
5-6 LEH-ST shop calibration setup ____________________________________ 5-35
5-7 LEH-ST Calibration Chart _________________________________________ 5-36
8-1 Weakpoint rating reduction due to temperature ______________________ 8-8
8-2 Broken weakpoint ________________________________________________ 8-11
Private
xii Heads ORM and MM Volume I / List of Tables xii
List of Tables
3-1 Monocable Heads and Kits Specifications ___________________________ 3-2

3-2 MH-22/ PEH-E/ PEH-EF/ EFA Upgrade for HTHP Operations ________ 3-5
3-3 MH-32 Upgrade for HTHP Operations_______________________________ 3-9
3-4 Adaptor heads, Kits and Combination of Monocable Heads__________ 3-11
3-5 Perforation Equipment Heads and Kits Specifications _______________ 3-14
3-6 Head Adapters ___________________________________________________ 3-15
3-7 Replacement parts to convert PEH-A to PEH-AB ___________________ 3-16
3-8 PEH-AB upgrade from 400 degF (204 degC) to 500 degF (260 degC) 3-16
3-9 Adapters, Kits and Combination of Perforation Equipment Heads ____ 3-22
3-10 Logging Equipment Heads Specifications __________________________ 3-28
3-11 Downhole Tension Sensor (Loadcell) Specifications ________________ 3-29
3-12 Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) Specifications _____________________ 3-29
3-13 Replacement Parts to use the Coil Spring Boots in LEH-QC _________ 3-34
3-14 Coil Spring Boots for Various Cable Sizes __________________________ 3-34
3-15 LEH-QC Upgrade from 400 to 500 degF (204 to 260 degC) _________ 3-35
3-16 LEH-QE upgrade from 400 degF to 500 degF (260 degC) ___________ 3-39
3-17 Kits and Combinations ____________________________________________ 3-42
4-1 Spider Weak Point Strengths, EH713123, Table 1 of 5 _______________ 4-3
4-6 Feedthrough Connectors Used with the MH-22 ______________________ 4-5
4-7 MH-32 Special Tools _______________________________________________ 4-5
4-8 Parameters for Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor__ 4-38
4-9 Calibration Parameters and Coefficients for Heads and Subs with
Tension/Compression Sensor _____________________________________ 4-39
4-10 Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's measure points 4-41
4-11 Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's Data Gauge
Display __________________________________________________________ 4-41
4-12 Table 3 8: Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's Log
Display __________________________________________________________ 4-41
4-13 Table 3 10: Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's
Channels ________________________________________________________ 4-41
4-16 Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's measure points 4-46
Display __________________________________________________________ 4-47
4-18 Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's Log Display ___ 4-47
4-19 Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's Channels _____ 4-47
Private
xiii Heads ORM and MM Volume I / List of Tables xiii
4-24 LEH-PT Troubleshooting __________________________________________ 4-89

4-25 Available Thermometers __________________________________________ 4-98
4-26 Cone Steel Boots for Various Cable Sizes _________________________ 4-103
4-27 Parameters for Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor_ 4-104
Tension/Compression Sensor ____________________________________ 4-105
4-29 Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's measure
points ___________________________________________________________ 4-107
Display _________________________________________________________ 4-107
Display _________________________________________________________ 4-107
Channels _______________________________________________________ 4-107
4-33 LEH-QT (With DLC) Failure Symptoms and Probable Causes ______ 4-109
4-34 LEH-QT (Without DLC) Failure Symptoms and Probable Causes ___ 4-110
4-35 Available Thermometers _________________________________________ 4-122
4-36 Cone Steel Boots for Various Cable Sizes _________________________ 4-126
4-37 Parameters for Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor_ 4-127
Tension/Compression Sensor ____________________________________ 4-128
4-39 Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's measure
points ___________________________________________________________ 4-130
Display _________________________________________________________ 4-130
Display _________________________________________________________ 4-130
Channels _______________________________________________________ 4-130
5-1 Head Maintenance Frequencies ____________________________________ 5-1
5-2 Reference Documents for PEH-L, Adaptor Heads and ECRD_________ 5-2
5-3 Recommended Grease for the Heads _______________________________ 5-4
5-4 FIT-1 Mechanical – MH-22, MH-32__________________________________ 5-8
5-5 FIT-2 Electrical – MH-22, MH-32____________________________________ 5-9
5-6 TRIM-1 Mechanical – MH-22, MH-32 ______________________________ 5-10
5-7 FIT-1 Mechanical – PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E ______________________ 5-11
5-8 FIT-2 Electrical – PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E ________________________ 5-12
5-9 TRIM-1 Mechanical – PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E ____________________ 5-14
5-10 FIT-1 Mechanical – PEH-AB, PEH-E, PEH-KD______________________ 5-15
5-11 FIT-2 Electrical – PEH-AB, PEH-E, PEH-KD________________________ 5-17
5-12 TRIM-1 Mechanical – PEH-AB, PEH-E, PEH-K _____________________ 5-18
5-13 FIT-1 Mechanical – LEHs _________________________________________ 5-20
5-14 FIT-2 Electrical – LEHs____________________________________________ 5-22
5-15 FIT-3 Operational – LEHs _________________________________________ 5-24
Private
xiv Heads ORM and MM Volume I / List of Tables xiv
5-16 TRIM-1 Mechanical – LEHs _______________________________________ 5-24

5-17 Shop Calibration Equipment _______________________________________ 5-26
5-18 LEH-PT Shop Calibration Equipment ______________________________ 5-31
5-19 LEH-ST Shop Calibration Equipment ______________________________ 5-34
7-1 Cable-Head Make-up and Auxiliary Hardware _______________________ 7-1

8-1 Parameters for Weakpoint Selection ________________________________ 8-4
8-2 Upper and Lower Weakpoint Rating Selection _______________________ 8-5
8-3 Example of Parameters Required for Weakpoint Selection ___________ 8-6
8-4 MSP, Maximum and Minimum Weakpoint Breaking Strength__________ 8-7
8-5 Weakpoint Strength Reduction by Temperature ______________________ 8-8
Private
HCS Sustaining Engineering\Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo\InTouch Content ID 3012542\4.0\Release Date:23-Mar-2018\EDMS UID: 275261732\Produced: 23-Mar-2018 04:07:36 1-i
Private
Introduction
Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Introduction

1-i
1-1 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Introduction 1-1
Introduction
The purpose of this maintenance manual is to provide field personnel with the
information required to properly operate, maintain and repair the cable heads
used for wireline operations. The manual is written so that new technicians can
understand and use it effectively and so that everyone, regardless of location,
can work to the same standard.
The General Descriptions & Specification, Operation, Disassembly and Assembly

sections are described by each head type while Safety and Maintenance
sections are detailed by head groups. BCC, Cone Type Rope Socket Assembly
and Weakpoints that are commonly used in most of the heads are described in
independent sections.
The most current information on Wireline Logging Heads will be posted on the
Logging Heads Reference Page, InTouch Content ID# 3258451.
Private
2-i Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Health, Safety & Environment 2-i
2 Health, Safety & Environment

2.1 Personnel Safety _______________________________________________ 2-1
2.2 Equipment Safety ______________________________________________ 2-1

2.3 Compliance with European Union Technical Directives _________ 2-2
2.3.1 Regulation __________________________________________________ 2-2
2.3.2 Identified Risk _______________________________________________ 2-3
2.3.3 Safety Guidelines ____________________________________________ 2-3
Private
2-1 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Health, Safety & Environment 2-1
Health, Safety & Environment

2.1 Personnel Safety

The following safety measures should be taken to ensure personnel safety while
working with the heads.
All Heads
1. Be aware that high voltages may exist in cable heads. Make sure that tool
power is off before working on a head attached to a logging cable.
2. Be aware of stored electrical charge on the cable after using the megohmeter.
A long length of cable acts as a capacitor to store electrical energy at the
output voltage of the megohmmeter. Always discharge the cable by shorting
the conductor to mass after using the megohmmeter.
3. Be careful not to get injured at the pinch points while
assembling/disassembling the heads.
Additional cautions for heads with a tension sensor (loadcell) - LEH-HT,
MT, PT, QT and ST
4. While calibrating the head with a tension sensor, be aware of the relatively
high tensions that will be encountered. Be sure to remove the weakpoint from
the head before calibration.
2.2 Equipment Safety

The following safety measures should be taken to ensure equipment safety
while working with the heads.
All Heads
1. Display the weakpoint rating of the head you are using in the unit.
2. Perform the scheduled maintenances of weakpoint and head (FIT, TRIM)
and record the result in the rig book and RITE.net.
3. Turn off all power supplies before connecting or disconnecting heads.
4. Verify the temperature/pressure rating of the head based on the type of the
weak point, boot and feedthrough prior to the job.
5. Be careful not to pinch or nick the exposed head wires during calibration,
disassembly or assembly.
Private
Additional cautions for heads with a mud temperature sensor (RTD) -

LEH-AA, PT, MT
6. Do not apply more than 2.00 mA DC excitation to the temperature transducer
(RTD) to prevent any damage to the device. Do not apply more than 50
VDC when checking the internal resistance of the RTD (pins 12, 13, 30 &
31 for LEH-MT and LEH-PT, pins 7,17, 18, 22 for LEH-AA) to prevent any
damage to the device.
Additional cautions for heads with a tension sensor (Loadcell) - LEH-HT,
MT, PT, QT and ST
7. Do not apply more than 15 V excitation to the strain gauge circuit. High
voltages or transients will permanently damage the loadcell. The 31-pin
adapter for the LEH is equipped with a gas-tube surge protector device.
When the 31-pin adapter is installed, this device will effectively protect the
tension sensor from accidental contact with a megger. If you are powering or
checking the load cell by itself, there is no surge protection in the circuit and
excess voltage will damage the sensor.
8. Use the 31-pin head extender (H245349) to meg the head. This will also
prevent contact with the tension sensor pins (#14,15,19,20). When megging
the head, apply voltage between the female BCC's and mass. This will
prevent accidental contact with loadcell terminals in the 31-pin adapter.
9. Do not attempt field repairs of the tension sensor. If the loadcell appears to
be the source of a failure, remove it from the head and return it to Technology
Center for analysis and repair through InTouch. See the troubleshooting
section for help in locating the source of the failure. Locations may want to
keep a spare loadcell assembly for this case.
10. The wet loadcell must be completely oil-filled. Check for air by pushing
down on the piston. Piston should not move. If oil is leaking, find the source
of the leak.
2.3 Compliance with European Union Technical

Directives
2.3.1 Regulation
1. Equipment imported for use in the European Union must comply with the
applicable EU technical directives.
2. The CE marking affixed on tools affirms compliance with these Directives,
which relies on risk analysis, design reviews and tests. A Declaration of
Conformity is available if requested by Authorities.
Private
3. The Low Voltage directive addresses the safety hazard for potential electrical
shocks.
2.3.2 Identified Risk

For Wireline or Testing downhole tools, powered between 50 Volts and 1,000
Volts through the Wireline cable, it has been determined that in normal operation
(excluding shop calibration & maintenance done in a shop), the only hazard not
covered by intrinsic isolation in the tool is related to the HANDLING OF TOOLS
while tool power is applied for wellsite check/test/calibration purpose before
going into the well. (See LCIE report 459460.)
2.3.3 Safety Guidelines

1. To prevent possible injury, it is recommended that all personnel handling
downhole equipment in these operating conditions adhere to the following
procedure. (This procedure is valid for all downhole tools operated in the
defined voltage range regardless of which Product Center designed and/or
sold the tool.)
2. All personnel handling downhole tools at the well site during a powered-up
check/test/calibration, must wear insulating gloves and use a grounding
clamp to connect the housing of the powered tool to ground.
3. SRPC has designed and/or selected the following items to meet the
regulation:
"High" voltage protective clip set: P790572 (for large diameters, like 3-3/8
in. and small diameters, like 1-11/16 in tools). Electrical insulating gloves:
meeting the standard EN 60903 / CEI 903 which can be either purchased
locally, so long as conforming with the standard, or through SRPC/WDC.
4. SLB field safety policy requires that standard leather handling cover gloves
must be worn over the electrical gloves (which are rubber). These can also be
purchased either locally or through WDC. Here is the list of part numbers for
the different types of gloves and sizes that can be purchased through WDC:
• E082699: elec. insulation gloves, class 0, 1,000V size 8

• E082703: cover gloves (mechanical risk), size 8
Private

Private
3-i Heads ORM and MM Volume I / General Descriptions and Specifications 3-i
3 General Descriptions and Specifications

3.1 Monocable Heads ______________________________________________ 3-1
3.1.1 Monocable Heads Specifications ______________________________ 3-2

3.1.2 MH-22 ______________________________________________________ 3-3
3.1.2.1 MH-22 Upgrade for HTHP Operations _____________________ 3-5
3.1.3 MH-32 ______________________________________________________ 3-7
3.1.3.1 MH-32 Upgrade for HTHP Operations _____________________ 3-9
3.1.4 Adapter Heads, Kits and Combination of Monocable Heads ____ 3-11
3.1.4.1 AH-38 __________________________________________________ 3-11
3.1.4.2 Perforating Equipment Kits _______________________________ 3-12
3.2 Perforating Equipment Heads _________________________________ 3-13
3.2.1 Perforation Equipment Heads Specifications __________________ 3-14
3.2.2 PEH-AB ____________________________________________________ 3-15
3.2.2.1 PEH-A Conversion to PEH-AB ___________________________ 3-16
3.2.2.2 PEH-AB Upgrade from 400 degF to 500 degF _____________ 3-16
3.2.3 PEH-E _____________________________________________________ 3-17
3.2.3.1 PEH-E Upgrade for HTHP Operations ____________________ 3-18
3.2.4 PEH-EF/ EFA _______________________________________________ 3-18
3.2.4.1 PEH-E Conversion to PEH-EF ___________________________ 3-19
3.2.4.2 PEH-EF Upgrade for HTHP Operations ___________________ 3-20
3.2.5 PEH-KD ____________________________________________________ 3-20
3.2.5.1 PEH-KC Conversion to PEH-KD __________________________ 3-21
3.2.6 PEH-L _____________________________________________________ 3-21
3.2.7 Adapters, Kits and Combination of Perforation Equipment
Heads ______________________________________________________ 3-22
3.2.7.1 AH-38 __________________________________________________ 3-22
3.2.7.2 PEK-E __________________________________________________ 3-22
3.2.7.3 PEK-BB ________________________________________________ 3-23
3.2.7.4 PEK-BC ________________________________________________ 3-24
3.3 Logging Equipment Heads ____________________________________ 3-25
3.3.1 Logging Equipment Heads Specifications _____________________ 3-27
3.3.2 LEH-AA ____________________________________________________ 3-30
3.3.3 LEH-HT ____________________________________________________ 3-30
3.3.3.1 LEH-QT Conversion to LEH-HT __________________________ 3-31
3.3.4 LEH-MT ____________________________________________________ 3-31
3.3.5 LEH-PT ____________________________________________________ 3-32
3.3.6 LEH-QC ____________________________________________________ 3-33
3.3.6.1 Using Coil Spring Boots in LEH-QC _______________________ 3-34
3.3.6.2 LEH-Q/QB Conversion to LEH-QC _______________________ 3-34
3.3.6.3 LEH-QC Upgrade from 400 to 500 degF __________________ 3-34
3.3.7 LEH-QT ____________________________________________________ 3-35
3.3.7.1 Dry Load Cell ___________________________________________ 3-36
3.3.7.2 LEH-Q/ QB/ QC Conversion to LEH-QT ___________________ 3-37
3.3.7.3 LEH-QT Upgrade from 400 to 500 degF (204 to 260 degC) _ 3-37
3.3.8 LEH-QE ____________________________________________________ 3-38
Private
3-ii Heads ORM and MM Volume I / General Descriptions and Specifications 3-ii
3.3.8.1 Using Coil Spring Boots in LEH-QE _______________________ 3-38

3.3.8.2 LEH-QE Upgrade From 400 degF to 500 degF (260 degC) _ 3-39
3.3.9 LEH-ST ____________________________________________________ 3-39
3.3.10 LEH-QO ____________________________________________________ 3-40
3.3.11 LEH-RC ____________________________________________________ 3-41

3.3.11.1 LEH-R Conversion to LEH-RC ___________________________ 3-41
3.3.11.2 LEH-RC Upgrade from 400 degF to 500 degF (260 degC) _ 3-42
3.3.12 Kits and Combinations of Logging Equipment Heads __________ 3-42
Private
3-1 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / General Descriptions and Specifications 3-1
General Descriptions and

Specifications
The cable head is a relatively simple device compared to many of the advanced
logging tools in use today. However, much action occurs in the small package of
the cable head. The cable head has to accomplish the following functions:
• Electrical connection from the cable to the tool
• Mechanical connection from the cable to the tool
• Transmission of cable torque to the tool
• Weakpoint for cable separation from the tool
• Measurement of Bottom Hole Temperature (BHT)
• Provide a neck for fishing
• Mass isolation of #10 (armor) and Weakpoint (bridle heads)
A cable head takes many important roles in linking the wireline cable to the
wireline tool string electrically and mechanically. Electrically, a cable head serves
as a connection crossover between cable lines and the bulkheads used in the
tools. Mechanically, the cable head needs to transmit tension and torque from
the cable to the logging tools. The head also contains some type of weakpoint,
intended to be broken in case the need arises to separate the cable from the
tool. Cable torque and tension are transmitted by means of a rope socket, which
is installed into a torpedo located inside the cable head. The rope socket outer
cone contains a slot that engages a lug located inside the torpedo. This lug/slot
engagement is necessary to transmit cable torque to the body of the cable head
and away from the weakpoint and electrical connections.
The proper maintenance is vital to make heads function well.
3.1 Monocable Heads

Monocable Heads (1-3/8 in or 1-11/16 in diameter) are designed to be used
for perforation or production services on mono cables or coaxial cables using
a single conductor and a spider weakpoint. They are available in two types,
MH-22 (H030796) and MH-32 (H353637). MH-22 has been also used as a part
of shooting bridle with 1-42ZB/ZH cable for perforation operations.
MH-22 is obsolete and MH-32 is the standard monocable head.
Private
Monocable heads can be converted to configurations with bigger head OD using

kits and an adaptor head (AH-38, PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E) as described
in Section 3.1.4.
Monocable heads can be upgraded for HTHP operations by the parts as

described in Section 3.1.2.1 and Section 3.1.3.1.
3.1.1 Monocable Heads Specifications

Monocable Heads are listed in the table below. For more detailed dimensions of
the head for fishing operations, refer to Section 6.4 Logging head dimensions for
fishing operations in Wireline Fishing Manual (InTouch # 4172213).
Quality Note
The PEH-EF/EFA or PEH-AB, with flexible weakpoints, are the only rated
heads for explosive services. Flexible weakpoints must be used for explosive
operations, such as gun strings or other services that involve shock loading
of the weakpoint. The flexible weakpoint is less susceptible to unintentional
separation under shock-loading conditions.
If an LEH or a XHUH is required for tractor operations involving explosive

services, an ECRD can be used. The ECRD cannot be used in conjunction with
a tandem rigid weakpoint. A WPSA must be ran in conjunction with the ECRD to
reduce the perforation shock on the ECRD bobbin.
Refer to the ECRD and tractor reference documentations for the ECRD and
tractor explosive qualifications and maintenance.
Table 3-1: Monocable Heads and Kits Specifications
Name MH-221 MH-32 AH-38

Description 1-3/8 Monocable 1-11/16 Monocable Adaptor Head 1-3/8 in
Head(Obsolete) Head to 1-11/16 in
Part Number H030796 H353637 H106437
Max OD 1-3/8 in 1-11/16 in 1-11/16 in
Make up length 18.9 in 12.47 in 3.36 in
Lower Head Connection Pin (1 Socket) Pin (1 Socket) Pin (1 Socket)
Type
Pressure Rating 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi
Temperature Rating 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF
Tension Rating 24 Klbs 35 Klbs 24 Klbs
Compression Rating 12 Klbs 17 Klbs 24 Klbs
Private
Release Device Option ERS ERS N/A

Weakpoint Type Spider Spider N/A
Fishing Neck OD 1.19 in 1.19 in N/A
Load cell option No No N/A

H2S resistant No Yes No
Conversion OD N/A N/A 1-3/8 in to 1-11/16 in
1
The MH-22 was obsoleted June 20, 2012.
3.1.2 MH-22
The MH-22 (1-3/8 in diameter monocable head, H030796) can be combined
with equipment of different diameters:
• 1-3/8 in standard
• 1-11/16 in with AH-38
• 2-5/8 in by PEK-E (H123293)
• 3-3/8 in by PEK-BB (H432221)
It uses the spider weak point as listed in the Spider Weakpoints table, Heads
Manual, Vol. 2.
Private
HCS Sustaining Engineering\Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo\InTouch Content ID 3012542\4.0\Release Date:23-Mar-2018\EDMS UID: 275261732\Produced: 23-Mar-2018 04:07:36 3-4
Spirol pin Hex collar Thrust ring Spirol pin (2) Bell housing
B013813 H034903 H230460 B013392 H030798 Lower head
subassembly
Private
H122373
1-3/8 monocable
Figure 3-1: MH-22 - H030796

Key O-ring Set screw Lock ring Insulator head
H030772 B013113 B013811 H030474 H125979 H030464
Thread protector
(not shown)
H122375
Connector Spirol pin Sleeve O-ring
H701182 B015067 H036384 B011968
MH-22 (H030796) Tubing
E050913

Heads ORM and MM Volume I / General Descriptions and Specifications
3-4
3.1.2.1 MH-22 Upgrade for HTHP Operations

MH-22 temperature and pressure rating can be upgraded to 500 degF (260
degC) (260 degC), 25 Kpsi for HTHP operations by replacing the parts listed in
the table below.
Table 3-2: MH-22/ PEH-E/ PEH-EF/ EFA Upgrade for HTHP Operations
Replacement 400 degF, 20K psi 500 degF (260 degC), 25K psi
Qty
Part P/N Remark P/N Remark
Refer to Refer to Section
Boot 1 Viton Kalrez
Section 6.2 6.2
1-11/16 in, 500degF,
1-3/8 in, H395895
Lower Head 25 Kpsi
1 H122373 400degF, 20
Sub-Assembly 1-3/8 in, 500degF,
Kpsi H395896
25 Kpsi
Recommended Lubriplate grease (B013366)
Mystik JT-6 Hi Temp Multi-purpose
Grease on – / Rutherford Slick-Stuf #4
grease (B039178)
Threads anti-galling grease (B022197)
Recommended
Grease on
Lubriplate grease (B013366) Krytox GPL-206 grease(B039179)
O-rings and
Backup rings
Quality Note
Lower Head Sub-Assembly (H122373) is also used in PEH-E and PEH-EF/ EFA.
Private
HCS Sustaining Engineering\Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo\InTouch Content ID 3012542\4.0\Release Date:23-Mar-2018\EDMS UID: 275261732\Produced: 23-Mar-2018 04:07:36 3-6 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / General Descriptions and Specifications 3-6
Figure 3-2: HTHP, 1-3/8 in, Monocable Lower Head (H395896)
Private
3.1.3 MH-32
The MH-32 (1-11/16-in monocable head, H353637) was designed based on

the requirements of the PSP (Production Services Platform) in coordination
with SRPC. It contains NACE-rated materials and is subject to the Platform
Express shock specification for reliability. MH-32 serves as a replacement for
the MH-22/AH-38 combination. It uses the spider weak point as listed in the
Spider Weakpoints table.
MH-32 has the following advantages over MH-22.

• Reduced length (12.4-in make-up length)
• Corrosion resistant (including H2S), hence, longer life
• Fewer parts (simpler to build)
• Eliminates the need of an AH-38
• Uses the same spider weak point to shorten the learning curve
• Uses the same plastic feedthrough as the MH-22
MH-32 has following changed features over MH-22.

• A shorter conductor length for the rope socket is used. (2.3-in, same as
cone rope socket)
• Dual grounding points are available
• Direct BCC termination is available for all cables (no more splicing)
• Fishing neck and bell housing are integrated into one part
• Cable torque is transmitted via a hex collar and groove-pins to the bell
housing
• More expensive than the MH-22/ AH-38 combination. The extra expense is
mostly due to the use of corrosion-resistant materials that are NACE rated
for H2S service.
TECH
__________
ALE RT
O-rings (B012068) that are used in the AH-38 and MH-32 have been found with
a manufacturing defect (oversized) (InTouch # 5672089).
Private
Figure 3-3: MH-32 Assembly (H353637)

Private
3.1.3.1 MH-32 Upgrade for HTHP Operations

MH-32 temperature and pressure rating can be upgraded to 500 degF (260
degC), 25 Kpsi for HTHP operations by replacing the parts listed in the table
below.
Table 3-3: MH-32 Upgrade for HTHP Operations
Replacement 400 degF, 20K psi 500 degF (260 degC), 25K psi
Qty
Refer to Section
Boot 1 Viton Refer to Section 6.2 Kalrez
6.2
1-11/16 in,
H395895 500 degF,
Lower Head 1-11/16 in, 25 Kpsi
1 H353643
Sub-Assembly 400degF, 20 Kpsi
1-3/8 in, 500
H395896
degF, 25 Kpsi
Recommended Lubriplate grease (B013366) /
Grease on – Rutherford Slick-Stuf #4 anti-galling
grease (B039178)
Threads grease (B022197)
Recommended
Grease on
Lubriplate grease (B013366) Krytox GPL-206 grease(B039179)
O-rings and
Backup rings
Private
Figure 3-4: HTHP, 1-11/16-in, monocable lower head (H395895)
Private
3.1.4 Adapter Heads, Kits and Combination of Monocable

Heads
Table 3-4: Adaptor heads, Kits and Combination of Monocable Heads
Head OD MH-22 (H030796, 1-3/8 in) MH-32 (H353637, 1-11/16 in)

1-11/16 in MH-22 + AH-38 (H106437) None
2-5/8 in MH-22 + PEK-E (H123293) None
MH-22 + PEK-BB (H432221)
3-3/8 in MH-22 + AH-38 (H106437) + MH-32 + PEK-BC (H395941)
PEK-BC (H395941)
Quality Note
Although any size tool can be adapted to any size of monocable, the 2-5/8-in,
2-3/4-in or 3-3/8-in tools are not to be connected to 0.23-in or smaller monocable.
3.1.4.1 AH-38
The transition from the 1-3/8-in diameter MH-22 head to the 1-11/16-in diameter
head is accomplished by the use of the AH-38 (H106437) adapter head. The
AH-38 screws onto the end of the MH-22, enabling the use of 1-11/16-in diameter
tools below it.
The AH-38 is a simple adapter head with one feedthrough connector as shown in
the figure below.
Private
Figure 3-5: AH-38, H106437
TECH
__________
ALE RT
O-rings (B012068) that are used in the AH-38 and MH-32 have been found with
a manufacturing defect (oversized) (InTouch # 5672089).
__________________
3.1.4.2 Perforating Equipment Kits

PEK-E, PEK-BB, PEK-BC are described in Sections 3.1.4, 3.2.7.2, 3.2.7.3, and
3.2.7.4.
Private
3.2 Perforating Equipment Heads

Perforation Equipment Heads (1-3/8 in or 1-11/16 or 3-3/8 in diameter) are

designed to be used for perforation, production, cased hole logging or FPIT
services. PEH’s are available in 5 types as listed in the table below
PEH-A and PEH-E are obsolete and PEH-AB is the standard for 3-3/8 in and
PEH-EF/ EFA is the standard for 1-3/8 in perforating equipment head.
Perforation equipment heads can be converted to larger OD’s using kits and an
adaptor head (AH-38, PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E) as described in Section 3.2.7:
Adapters, Kits and Combination of Perforation Equipment Heads.
PEH-AB, PEH-E and PEH-EF/ EFA temperature and/or pressure rating can be
upgraded to 500 degF (260 degC), 25 Kpsi as described in Section 3.2.2.2:
PEH-AB Upgrade from 400 degF to 500 degF, 3.2.4.2: PEH-EF Upgrade for
HTHP Operations.
Perforating equipment head accommodates rigid or flexible weakpoints as listed

in Appendix V.
Quality Note

Private
3.2.1 Perforation Equipment Heads Specifications

Perforating equipment heads and kits are listed in the table below. For more
detailed dimensions of the head for fishing operations, refer to Section 6.4
Logging head dimensions for fishing operations in Wireline Fishing Manual
(InTouch # 4172213).
Table 3-5: Perforation Equipment Heads and Kits Specifications
1
Name PEH-AB PEH-E PEH-EF/EFA PEH-KD PEH-L
Perforating
1-3/8 in perforating
Equipment 1-3/8 in diameter 1-3/8 in perforating
equipment head 1 - 11/16 HEPTA/
Description Head, 3-3/8 in perforating equipment equipment head
with solid weakpoint COAX CABLE HEAD
10-conductor, with no head heptacable
(Obsolete)
thermometers
101043054, previously
Part Number H222893 H108785 100343360 J287479
H713120
Max OD 3-3/8 in 1-3/8 in 1-3/8 in 1-11/16 in 1-3/8 in
Make up length 24.27 in 20.87 in 31.53 30.68 in 20.87 in
Lower Head Pin (10 Pin (1 Pin (1 Box (22 Box (8

Connection Type sockets) Socket) Socket) pins) Pins)
Pressure Rating 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 30 Kpsi
Temperature Rating 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF
Tension Rating 130 Klbs 47 Klbs 47 Klbs 18 Klbs 28 Klbs
Compression Rating 91 Klbs 38 Klbs 38 Klbs 18 Klbs 28 Klbs
Release Device
No ERS ERS No No
Option
Weakpoint Type SOLID/FLEX SOLID FLEX SOLID SOLID
Fishing Neck OD 2.31 in 1.19 in 1.19 in 1.19 in 1.19 in
Load Cell Option No No No No No
Thermometer carrier
No No No No No
option
H2S resistant No No No No No
Conversion OD N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

1
The PEH-E was obsoleted June 30, 2012.
Private
Table 3-6: Head Adapters
Name PEK-BB PEK-BC PEK-E PEK-BD PEK-F PEK-BE
Perforation Perforation Perforation Perforation

Perforation Perforation
Equipment Kit Equipment Kit Equipment Kit 1-3/8 Equipment Kit
Description Equipment Kit Equipment Kit
1-3/8 in to 1-3/8 in to 3-3/8 in to 2-5/8-in for 1-11/16 in to 3-3/8-in
1-11/16 in to 3-3/8-in 1-3/8 in to 2-5/8-in
3-3/8-in in for PEH-EFA PEH-EFA for PEH-EFA
Part Number H432221 H395941 H123293 101154417 101154480 101154490
Max OD 3-3/8 in 3-3/8 in 2-5/8 in 3-3/8 in 2-5/8 in 3-3/8 in
Make up length 25.66 in 28.64 in 22.275 in 38.25 in 32.97 in 41.55 in
Lower Head
Pin (1 Socket) Pin (1 Socket) Pin (1 Socket) Pin (1 Socket) Pin (1 Socket) Pin (1 Socket)
Connection Type
Pressure Rating 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi
Temperature Rating 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF
Tension Rating 82 Klbs 91 Klbs 82 Klbs 72 Klbs 30 Klbs 54 Klbs
Compression
82 Klbs 91 Klbs 82 Klbs - - -
Rating
Release Device
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Option
Weakpoint Type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Fishing Neck OD 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in
Load Cell Option No No No N/A N/A N/A
Thermometer
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
carrier option
H2S resistant No No No No No No
1-3/8 in to
Conversion OD 1-3/8 in to 3-3/8 in 1-11/16 in to 3-3/8 in 1-3/8 in to 2-5/8 in 1-3/8 in to 2-5/8 in 1-11/16 in to 3-3/8 in
3-3/8 in
3.2.2 PEH-AB
PEH-AB (3-3/8 in diameter perforating equipment head, H222893, 350 degF
[176 degC], 20 Kpsi) has 10 socket connectors at the pin type lower head. It is
designed to run with 3-3/8 in equipment.
The bell housing (H108135) of the PEH-AB does not have provisions for
thermometer carriers and has the standard fishing neck (H108149) 13 in long and
2.31 in diameter that eliminates the need of the fishing bell extension as PEH-A.
The plastic feedthrough (H701185) has replaced the old Inconel, glass-sealed,
large-body feedthrough (H245804) that was used in the PEH-A. This new
feedthrough offers improved reliability at the same cost as the old type of
feedthrough. The new part is a drop in replacement for the old feedthrough,
Private
requiring the same O-rings and other connector parts. The temperature
capability of the plastic feedthrough is dependent on the cavity design. In the
PEH-AB, that capability is 500 degF (260 degC).
A split torpedo is used to connect the head to the multi-conductor rope socket.
When the weakpoint is pulled in two, the rope socket, split torpedo, extension
sleeve, split extension and weakpoint connector are returned to surface.
PEH-AB accommodates rigid or flexible weakpoints as listed in Table V-2,

V-4, V-5, V-6, V-7 of Appendix V. Weakpoint connector (H407681) or optional
connector (H105312) may be used with the standard molded solid weakpoint
or the modular weakpoint assembly.
Quality Note
Due to reduced shock resistance of solid weakpoints comparing to flexible
weakpoints, PEH-AB with a solid weakpoint should be not be used in operations
involving shock such as perforations or chronological samplings to prevent an
unintentional pull off.
3.2.2.1 PEH-A Conversion to PEH-AB

A PEH-A (H105313) can be converted to a PEH-AB by replacing the parts listed
in the table below.
Table 3-7: Replacement parts to convert PEH-A to PEH-AB
Replacement Part Qty PEH-A PEH-AB

Bell Housing 1 H251881 H108135
Fishing Neck 1 H407534 H108149
Weakpoint Connector 1 H407688 H407681
3.2.2.2 PEH-AB Upgrade from 400 degF to 500 degF

PEH-AB can be upgraded from 400 degF to 500 degF (260 degC) in temperature
rating by replacing the parts as listed in the table below.
Table 3-8: PEH-AB upgrade from 400 degF (204 degC) to 500 degF (260 degC)
400 degF, 20 Kpsi 500 degF (260 degC), 20 Kpsi

Replacement
Qty PN Remark PN Remark
Part
SZ 2-332,
O-ring 2 B011316 B042248 Chemraz
VITON, 95D
Private
400 degF, 20 Kpsi 500 degF (260 degC), 20 Kpsi

Replacement
Qty PN Remark PN Remark
Part
SZ 2-115,
VITON, 95D
SZ 2-011,
VITON, 95D
Boot 15 H400313 Viton H245758 Chemraz
Downhole H122757 – – H122757 – –

16 ft
hook-up wire Use H122757 for any operations
500 degF (260 degC) rated
Weakpoint 1 Use 400 degF rated weakpoints
weakpoints
Grease on –– / Rutherford Slick-Stuf #4 Mystik JT-6 Hi Temp
Threads anti-galling grease (B022197) Multi-purpose grease (B039178)
Recommended
Grease on
–– Lubriplate grease (B013366) Krytox GPL-206
O-rings and
grease(B039179)
Backup rings
Note
Feedthrough connectors (H701185) will function at 500 degF (260 degC) but
maybe difficult to remove.
3.2.3 PEH-E
PEH-E (H108785) is a 1-3/8 in diameter perforating equipment head with solid
weakpoint, rated to 400degF, 20 Kpsi. PEH-E has a pin lower head with a socket
contact. It is designed for use on cables with cone type rope sockets and may be
run with 1-3/8 in, 1-11/16 in, or 3-3/8 in equipment. The attachment to the cable
rope socket is similar to other PEH type heads using a split torpedo.
The large-body plastic feedthrough (H701182, 400 degF, 20 Kpsi) is the standard
on the PEH-E head. It is a drop in replacement for the old feedthrough (H245801)
and requires the same seals.
A torpedo (H245120) is available for use with the coil spring boot, for ease of use
when switching between LEH-Q type heads and PEH-E heads.
PEH-E accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in the “Rigid High Temperature

Weakpoints PEH-E/KD” table in Vol II, appendices.
Private
Quality Note
Due to reduced shock resistance of solid weakpoints compared to flexible
weakpoints, PEH-E with a solid weakpoint should not be used in operations

involving shock, such as perforations to prevent an unintentional pull off.
3.2.3.1 PEH-E Upgrade for HTHP Operations

PEH-E temperature and pressure rating can be upgraded to 500 degF (260
degC), 25 Kpsi for HTHP operations as MH-22 by replacing the parts listed in
Table 3-2: MH-22/ PEH-E/ PEH-EF/ EFA Upgrade for HTHP Operations and
using the downhole hook-up wire (H122757, 550 degF [287 degC]).
3.2.4 PEH-EF/ EFA

The PEH-EF (101043054, previously H713120) is a 1-3/8 in diameter perforating
equipment head. PEH-EF is rated to 400 degF, 20 Kpsi and has a pin lower head
with a socket contact as shown in the figure below. It is a single conductor head
and may be run with 1-3/8 in, 1-11/16 in, or 3-3/8 in equipment. It is designed to
be used on cables with cone type rope sockets. The attachment to the cable
rope socket is similar to other PEH type heads using a split torpedo. A torpedo
(H245120) is available for use with the coil spring boot, for ease of use when
switching between LEH-Q type heads and PEH-E heads.
The large-body plastic feedthrough (H701182, 400 degF, 20 Kpsi) is the standard
on the PEH-EF head. It is a drop in replacement for the old feedthrough
(H245801) and requires the same seals.
PEH-EF accommodates flexible weakpoints as listed in “Flexible Weakpoints for

PHE-AB/PEH-EF (listing only)” table and ”Speciality Weakpoints for ECRD and
Loadcell” table in Vol II, appendices.
Private
Quality Note

Figure 3-6: PEH-EF - 101043054, previously H713120
3.2.4.1 PEH-E Conversion to PEH-EF

A PEH-E (H108785) can be converted to a PEH-EF (101043054, previously
H713120) with conversion kit PEHK-EF (H713119) that change the following
parts in the PEH-E as shown in the figure below.
• Replace the Lower Housing H113588 with H701654.
• Add upper adapter (H712970) and lower adapter (H712971) so that a flexible
weakpoint can be used.
Ensure that the downhole hook-up wires for the PEH-EF are cut to at least 32
in to accommodate the longer lower housing of the PEH-EF. For the complete
assembly of the PEH-EF, refer to Section 4.7.2
Private
PEH-E
Lower housing 9.5”
H113588
Rigid Weak Point
PEH-E to PEH-EF Conversion
20.1
6”
Lower housing
H701654
Upper adapter
H712970
Flexible weak point
Lower adapter
H712971
Figure 3-7: PEH-E to PEH-EF Conversion
3.2.4.2 PEH-EF Upgrade for HTHP Operations

PEH-EF temperature and pressure rating can be upgraded to 500 degF (260
degC), 25 Kpsi for HTHP operations as MH-22 by replacing the parts listed in
Table 3-2: MH-22/ PEH-E/ PEH-EF/ EFA Upgrade for HTHP Operations and
using the downhole hook-up wire (H122757, 550 degF) and 500 degF (260
degC) rated weakpoints.
3.2.5 PEH-KD
PEH-KD (PEH-KC, 1-11/16 Hepta/Coax cable head,100343360, 400 degF, 20
Kpsi) has 22 socket connectors at the pin type lower head. It may be run on coax
or heptacables. It is designed for use on cables with cone type rope sockets.
The PEH-KD contains seven slim-body plastic fluid-to-air connectors, arranged in

a small diameter package to fit inside the 1-11/16 in head. When the weakpoint
is separated, the upper head separates from the lower housing, exposing the
1-3/16 in Otis fishing tool head as on the PEH-E head.
Private
The assembly of the head contains several subassemblies, which are found on
drawings H407042, and H407071. Use removal tool H256138 to remove / install
the lower head assembly, H407042.
The upper portion of the head is very similar in construction to the standard
PEH-E head. The lower head is different, due to the requirement for seven
feedthroughs, instead of the single feedthrough in the PEH-E head. The lower
head subassembly is detailed in the subassembly drawings.
PEH-KD accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in Table Y-4, Heads Manual,

Vol. 2.
3.2.5.1 PEH-KC Conversion to PEH-KD

PEH-KC (1-11/16 Hepta/Coax cable head) has been replaced by PEH-KD by
the mandatory MR-1 (100338693). The rebuild kit part number is 100335086.
For more details, refer to the PEH-KC MR-1 document that can be available
in RITE.net.
3.2.6 PEH-L
PEH-L (J287479) is a 1-3/8 in perforating equipment head heptacable rated to
400 degF, 30 Kpsi. PEH-L is a strengthened PEH-E to withstand the back-off
overpressure and equipped with a seven pin conductor. Reinforcement has
been essentially achieved through a change in material. It is designed to be
used specifically for FPIT services. For more details of FPIT, refer to FPIT-C
Maintenance Manual (InTouch #3264777) and FPIT-D Maintenance Manual
(InTouch # 3016135).
The new split torpedo housing, with its two screws and their spirol pin, remains
compatible with the standard one.
PEH-L accommodates a specific rigid weakpoint (J952256, 4,800 lb. to 5,400

lbf).
Private
3.2.7 Adapters, Kits and Combination of Perforation

Equipment Heads
Table 3-9: Adapters, Kits and Combination of Perforation Equipment Heads
PEH-EF/ EFA (101043054) previously

Head OD PEH-E (H108785) 1-3/8 in
(H713120) 1-3/8 in
PEH-E + PEHK-EF (H713119) =
1-3/8 in PEH-EFA (101043054)/ PEH-EF Standard
(H713120)
1-11/16 in PEH-E + AH-38 (H106437) PEH-EF/ EFA + AH-38 (H106437)
PEH-EF/ EFA + Bell Housing
2-5/8 in PEH-E + PEK-E (H123293)
(100407337) + PEK-E (H123293)
PEH-EF/ EFA + Bell Housing
PEH-E + PEK-BB (H432221)
(10080637) + PEK-BB
3-3/8 in PEH-EF/ EFA + Bell Housing

PEH-E + AH-38 (H106437) +
(T5018160) + Sleeve (T5018161) +
PEK-BC (H395941)
PEK-BC (H395941)
3.2.7.1 AH-38
Refer to Section 3.1.4.1: AH-38
3.2.7.2 PEK-E
PEK-E(H123293) is a Perforation Equipment Kit rated to 400 degF (204 degC),
20 Kpsi that enables a quick conversion of the 1-3/8 in head such as MH-22
(H030796) or PEH-E (H108785) to the 2-5/8 in configuration.
PEK-E can also be used with PEH-EF/ EFA; however bell housing (100407337)
is required as shown in the figure below. This assembly is called the PEK-F
(101154480).
Private
Figure 3-8: Conversion of the PEK-E for PEH-EF Head
3.2.7.3 PEK-BB
PEK-BB (H432221) is a Perforation Equipment Kit rated to 400 degF (204 degC),
20Kpsi that enables a quick conversion of the 1-3/8 in head such as MH-22
(H030796) or PEH-E (H108785) to the 3-3/8 in configuration.
The PEK-BB can be also used for PEH-EF/ EFA; however, the bell housing
(10080637) is required as shown in the figure below. This assembly is called the
PEK-BD (101154417).
Private
Figure 3-9: Conversion of PEK-BB to PEH-EF/ EFA Head
3.2.7.4 PEK-BC
PEK-BC (H395941) is a Perforation Equipment Kit rated to 400 degF (204 degC),
20Kpsi that enables a quick conversion of the 1-11/16 in head such as MH-32 or
MH-22/PEH-E with an AH-38 to the 3-3/8 in configuration.
PEK-BC can be also used for PEH-EF/ EFA; however bell housing (T5018160)
and a sleeve (T5018161) are required as shown in the figure below. This
assembly is called the PEK-BE (101154490).
Private
Figure 3-10: Conversion of the PEK-BC for PEH-EF/ EFA Head
3.3 Logging Equipment Heads

Logging equipment heads are designed to be used for logging services on hepta
cables using multiple conductors. They are available in ten types as listed in .
Logging equipment heads commonly have a 31-pin female lower connection.

It can be connected directly to the common 31-pin, 3-3/8 in logging tools and
the armored logging cable or bridles (BRT-AQ, BRT-BA or BRT-BC). The mass
isolation feature of the LEH/BRT combination is built into the bridle cable rather
than the weakpoint as in EQCS-34 (obsolete) and PEH-AB cable heads. Any
logging equipment heads listed below can be teamed with these bridles to
replace the old EQCS-34 bridle head. This will reduce the number of different
heads that have to be maintained and carried on the truck.
All heads come standard with plastic feedthroughs. The small-body plastic
feedthrough required a change in the machined cavity of the lower head, so
they are not a drop in replacement. The temperature capability of the plastic
feedthrough depends on the design of the machined cavity. In all current
logging equipment heads, that capability is 500 degF (260 degC). The plastic
feedthrough was developed for increased reliability of the cable connection.
Private
LEH-HT, MT, PT, QT and ST provide downhole tension measurements using a

wet loadcell or a dry loadcell as listed in . The electronic circuit in the telemetry
cartridge measures the strain resistance caused by the tension applied along
the load cell and sends it to surface. The MAXIS/Maxwell software converts
the resistance reading into the tension. The downhole tension measurement
provides a clearer picture of stuck in-hole situations that may occur in sticky
or deviated holes. The tension sensor is located where it is most effective,
directly below the weakpoint in the head, which should prevent many accidental
pull-offs. In addition, the downhole tension data makes more accurate cable
stretch corrections possible, which improves the interpretation and quality control
of the other logs.
LEH-AA, MT and PT provide the mud temperature measurement using a RTD

(Resistance Thermometer Detector) that is exposed to the borehole as listed in
Table 3-12: Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) Specifications. The electronics
circuit in the telemetry cartridge measures the RTD resistance which varies by
the ambient temperature and sends it to surface. The MAXIS/Maxwell software
converts the resistance reading into the mud temperature.
To monitor the tension and mud temperature measurement, the logging

equipment heads with the sensors should be run with the telemetry cartridge
which processes the downhole tension and the mud temperature as a TCC-BF,
DTC, EDTC or STGC/QTGC/HTGC.
LEH-HT, MT and PT can be used for HTHP operations due to their high
temperature and pressure ratings.
All heads except LEH-ST (due to the wet load cell) can be upgraded to 500 degF
(260 degC) with high temperature components.
The heads are very similar and share a maximum number of common parts.
The modification kits change only the downhole end of the LEH, the upper end
is identical to the common LEH-QC, except for the LEH-ST, where uphole end
configuration is the same as for other SLIM tools.
Logging equipment heads accommodate rigid weakpoints as listed in Appendix

Y, Heads Manual, Vol. 2. An ECRD can be run on the LEH-HT, MT, PT, QE, QT,
ST as an optional equipment. For more details, refer to ECRD-E/F Operations
and Maintenance Manual (InTouch # 4324935).
Adapters are available for connecting the heads to a wide variety of different tool
diameters and pin configurations as described in Section 3.3.13.
Following heads is the standard Logging Equipment Heads.

• LEH-QC (H701916) without a tension sensor.
• LEH-QT (H701460) with a tension sensor.
Private
The following heads are obsolete:

• LEH-Q : 3-3/8 in, 31-pin with old feedthroughs (H245163), replaced by
LEH-QC
• LEH-QB : 3-3/8 in, 31-pin with plastic feedthroughs (H701982), replaced

by LEH-QC
• LEH-R : 2-3/4 in, 29-pin (H245164), replaced by LEH-RC
The following heads are under development:
LEH-TR : 2-1/2 in, 31-pin box down Tractor Logging Equipment Head (H354533).
It can be attached to a monocable via a spider rope socket and incorporates the
tension module and the ECRD module.
3.3.1 Logging Equipment Heads Specifications

The specifications of Logging Equipment Heads, Downhole Tension Sensor
(Loadcell) and Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) are listed in , , Table 3-12:
Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) Specifications respectively. For more detailed
dimensions of the head for fishing operations, refer to Section 6.4 Logging
head dimensions for fishing operations in Wireline Fishing Manual (InTouch
# 4172213).
Quality Note

Private
Table 3-10: Logging Equipment Heads Specifications
1
Name LEH-AA LEH-HT LEH-MT LEH-PT LEH-QC LEH-QT LEH-QE LEH-QO 1 LEH-RC 1 LEH-ST
SlimHot
HTHP Logging
HTHP
Logging Head Head Head w/o Logging
Logging Logging Logging Head 2-1/2 Dia
Head w/Tension W/Tension Tension, Equipment
Equipment Head Equipment 2-3/4 Dia, Head
Description w/Tension, and Mud 3-3/8 Dia, 3–3/8 Dia, Head,
Head, W/Tension Head 3-3/8 29-Pin, w/Tension,
3-3/8 D, 31 Temperature 31-Pin, 31 Pin Box 3-3/8 in dia.
2-1/4 in & Mud Dia, 31-Pin Box Down 31-Pin
Pin Box Sensors, Box Down Down Oil Filled
Temp
Down 3 in. Dia.,
31 pin
PN 100032194 H356846 H360190 T5013565 H701916 H701460 100055779 H360020 H713338 H351344
Max OD 2-1/4 in 3-3/8 in 3-3/8 in 3 in 3-3/8 in 3-3/8 in 3-3/8 in 3-3/8 in 2-3/4 in 2-1/2 in
Make-up
28.25 in 39.73 in 41.97 in 40.99 in 32.68 in 41.87 in 39.73 in – – 31.78 in 39.61 in
Length
Weight 19 lbm 33 lbm 42 lbm 33 lbm 28 lbm 33 lbm 33 lbm – – 28 lbm 27 lbm
Lower Head
Box (22 Box (31 Box (31 Box (31 Box (31 Box (31 Box (31 Box (31 Box (29 Box (31
Connection
pins) pins) pins) pins) pins) pins) pins) pins) pins) pins)
Type
Pressure
8 Kpsi 25 Kpsi 25 Kpsi 30 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi 20 Kpsi
Rating
Temperature 500 degF 500 degF 500 degF

194 degF 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF 400 degF
Rating (260 degC) (260 degC) (260 degC)
Tension
40 Klbs 50 Klbs 50 Klbs 50 Klbs 50 Klbs 50 Klbs 50 Klbs 50 Klbs 50 Klbs 50 Klbs
Rating
Compression
20 Klbs 25 Klbs 25 Klbs 25 Klbs 25 Klbs 25 Klbs 25 Klbs 25 Klbs 25 Klbs 25 Klbs
Rating
Release
No ECRD ECRD ECRD No ECRD ECRD No No ECRD
Device Option
Weakpoint
SOLID SOLID SOLID SOLID SOLID SOLID SOLID SOLID SOLID SOLID
Type
Fishing Neck
2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in 2.31 in
OD
Tension
Sensor DRY (as
NO DRY WET WET NO DRY NO NO WET
(Loadcell) option)
option
Mud
temperature
YES NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO
sensor (RTD)
option
Thermometer
NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
carrier option
1
The LEH-QC, LEH-QO and LEH-RC were obsoleted 01–Mar-2013.
Private
Table 3-11: Downhole Tension Sensor (Loadcell) Specifications
Load Cell Type Dry Dry Wet Wet
Load Cell Assy.

100807928 100323783 H356841 H360047 T5013560 H351342

Part No.
Sensor Part No. 100669732 100353269 H356842 H701463
-1,000 to
Load Range 0 - 8,000 lbf 0 - 8,000 lbf -1,000 to 8,000 lbf
8,000 lbf
Operating
- 14.7 psi to
Pressure 14.7 psi to 30 Kpsi 14.7 psi to 20 Kpsi - 14.7 psi to 30 Kpsi
30Kpsi
Range
Operating -65 degF to

-65 degF to 500 degF (260 degC) -65 degF to 400 degF -65 degF to 500 degF (260 degC)
Temp. Range 400 degF
+/- 3% FS while under any +/- 3.00% FS while under any

combination of Temperature (-65°F combination of Temperature
to 350°F), Pressure (14.7 psi (-65°F to 350°F), Pressure
to 15 Kpsi) and Tensile Load (14.7 psi to 15 Kpsi) and
± 3% FS
(0 lbs to 8 Klbs) Tensile Load (0 lbs to 8 Klbs)
Accuracy ± 3% FS (full scale) or 240 lbf (full scale)
+/- 5.00% FS while under any +/- 5.00% FS while under any
or 240 lbf
combination of Temperature combination of Temperature
(350°F to 500°F), Pressure (15 (350°F to 400°F), Pressure
Kpsi to 30 Kpsi) and Tensile (15 Kpsi to 20 K psi) and
Load (0 lbs to 8 Klbs) Tensile Load (0 lbs to 8 Klbs)
Rated 10 VAC or
10 VAC or VDC 10 VAC or VDC 10 VAC or VDC
Excitation VDC
15 VAC or
Max. Excitation 15 VAC or VDC 15 VAC or VDC 15 VAC or VDC
VDC
LEH-HT LEH-QT LEH-QT LEH-HT LEH-MT LEH-PT LEH-ST

Head
Compatibility Standard Load Optional Load Optional Standard Standard Optional
Optional Load Cell
Cell Cell Load Cell Load Cell Load Cell Load Cell
Table 3-12: Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) Specifications
RTD Part No. 100088599 H360028

Head type LEH-AA LEH-MT LEH-PT
Temperature -4 degF to 212degF -76 degF to 572 degF

Range (-20 degC to 100 degC) (-60 degC to 300 degC)
Pressure
10 Kpsi 30 Kpsi
Rating
± 0.3 degC at 0 degF
± 0.3 degC at 0 degF ± 0.35 degC at 100 degC
Accuracy
± 0.35 degC at 100 degC ± 0.55 degC at 200 degC
± 0.75 degC at 300 degC
Private
3.3.2 LEH-AA
The LEH-AA (100032194) is a 2-1/4 in diameter Logging Equipment Head

rated to 194 degF, 8 Kpsi. LEH-AA has 22 pin connectors at the box type lower
head. It was primarily developed to meet the demands of low cost for the High
Volume – Low Tier markets. Due to this reason, it does not have a downhole
tension device.
The LEH-AA accommodates up to a 7-39 Hepta Cable and a 1-23/1-25/1-32

Monocable. The reason for only the 1-32 Monocable is because this is the only
Mono-Cable that will fit into a cone type Rope Socket. A Spider Rope Socket is
not recommended for this application.
The LEH-AA does not have provisions for thermometer carriers to measure
the maximum borehole temperature, but provides the mud temperature
measurements using a mud temperature sensor, RTD (100088599) as listed in
Table 3-12: Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) Specifications.
Overall, the components located in the mud zone are basically identical to an
LEH-QT. The down-hole end of the LEH-AA has a double start stub acme thread
that was designed for a faster make-up at the rig site.
LEH-AA accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in Appendix Y, Heads Manual,

Vol. 2.
3.3.3 LEH-HT
The LEH-HT (H356846) is a 3-3/8 in diameter HTHP Logging Equipment
Head with Tension rated to 500 degF (260 degC), 25 Kpsi. LEH-HT has 31
pin connectors at the box type lower head. It is a modified LEH-QT for high
temperature and pressure, HTHP operations (500 degF [260 degC[ and 25,000
psi).
LEH-HT provides downhole tension measurements; the Wet Loadcell (500

degF (260 degC), 25 Kpsi, H356841) has been replaced with the Dry Loadcell
(500 degF [260 degC], 30 Kpsi, 100807928). To monitor the downhole tension
measurements, LEH-HT must be run with a telemetry cartridge such as TCC-B
(MR6), DTC in a flask, EDTC or HTGC (3-3/4 in diameter, Xtreme Platform,
STGC with a Dewar Flask Assembly UDFH-KLA H623408, 500 degF (260
degC), 25 Kpsi).
The LEH-HT may be used with any tool string given the appropriate adapters for
tool make-up diameter and head pin configuration.
Private
LEH-HT requires the same software and hardware setup as the LEH-QT. The
same operating and logging principles apply to the LEH-HT as apply to the
LEH-QT.
LEH-HT accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in Appendix Y, Heads Manual,

Vol. 2. An ECRD can be run on the LEH-HT as optional equipment. For more
details, refer to ECRD-E/F Operations and Maintenance Manual (InTouch #
4324935).
3.3.3.1 LEH-QT Conversion to LEH-HT

A LEH-QT (H701460) can be converted to a LEH-HT using a high temperature
kit (H395953) as listed in Table B-2, Appendix B, Heads Manual, Vol. 2.
3.3.4 LEH-MT
The LEH-MT (H360190) is a 3-3/8 in diameter HTHP Logging Equipment Head
with Tension & Mud Temperature Sensor rated to 500 degF (260 degC), 25 Kpsi.
LEH-MT has 31 pin connectors at the box type lower head. It can be used for
HTHP operations due to its high temperature and pressure ratings (500 degF
(260 degC), 25 Kpsi).
LEH-MT provides downhole tension measurements using a Wet Loadcell (500

degF (260 degC), 25 Kpsi, H360047) and mud temperature measurements
using a mud temperature sensor, RTD (572 degF, 30 Kpsi, H360028) listed
in Tables and Table 3-12: Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) Specifications. To
monitor these measurements, LEH-MT must be run with a telemetry cartridge
such as TCC-B (MR6), DTC in a flask, EDTC or HTGC (3-3/4 in diameter,
Xtreme Platform, STGC with a Dewar Flask Assembly UDFH-KLA H623408, 500
degF (260 degC), 25 Kpsi).
LEH-MT accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in Table V-5 of Appendix V.

An ECRD can be run on the LEH-MT as optional equipment. For more details,
refer to ECRD-E/F Operations and Maintenance Manual (InTouch # 4324935).
Private
Quality Note
• In order to monitor the mud temperature on the STGC-BA, Mod Recap 01
(J961462 ) must be installed. STGC-BB and STGC-BC can monitor both

head tension and mud temperature. In order to run the LEH-MT with an
ECRD installed, the STGC-BA/BB/BC must have Mod Recap 05 (100611123)
installed. For more details, refer to STGC-BC/HTGC-BC/QTGC-BC
Maintenance Manual (InTouch # 3012906).
• Because of the extreme temperature and pressure ratings of the LEH-MT, the
STGC must be installed into an UDFH-KLA (Dewar Flask Assembly). The
installation of the STGC into the UDFH-KLA forms a HTGC.
3.3.5 LEH-PT
The LEH-PT (T5013565) is a 3 in diameter SlimHot Logging Equipment Head
with Tension and Mud Temperature Sensors rated to 500 degF (260 degC),
30 Kpsi. LEH-PT has 31 pin connectors at the box type lower head. It can be
used for HTHP operations due to its high temperature and pressure ratings (500
degF (260 degC), 30 Kpsi).
LEH-PT provides downhole tension measurements using a Wet Loadcell (500

degF (260 degC), 25 Kpsi, T5013560) and the mud temperature measurements
using a mud temperature sensor, RTD (572 degF, 30 Kpsi, H360028) listed in
Tables , and Table 3-12: Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) Specifications. To
acquire these measurements, LEH-PT must be run with a telemetry cartridge
such as TCC-B (MR6), DTC in a flask or EDTC with an AH-333 (3 in, 31-pin to
3-3/8 in, 31-pin adapter, eccentered, 500 degF (260 degC), 30 Kpsi, 100190147)
or QTGC (3 in, SlimXtreme Platform, STGC with a Dewar Flask Assembly
UDFH-PLA T1037560, 500 degF (260 degC), 30 Kpsi).
LEH-PT accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in Appendix Y, Heads Manual,

Vol. 2. An ECRD can be run on the LEH-PT as optional equipment. For more
4324935).
Private
Quality Note
• In order to monitor the mud temperature on the STGC-BA, Mod Recap
01 (J961462 ) must be installed. STGC-BB and STGC-BC can monitor

both head tension and mud temperature. In order to run the LEH-PT with
an ECRD installed, the STGC-BA/ BB/ BC must have Mod Recap 05
(100611123) installed. For more details, refer to STGC-BC/ HTGC-BC/
QTGC-BC Maintenance Manual (InTouch # 3012906).
• Because of the extreme temperature and pressure ratings of the LEH-PT, the
STGC must be installed into an UDFH-KLA (Dewar Flask Assembly). The
installation of the STGC into the UDFH-KLA forms a HTGC.
3.3.6 LEH-QC
Note
LEH-RC, LEH-QC and LEH-QO will become obsolete effective March 1, 2013.
For more details, see InTouch Announcement 5924419.
The LEH-QC (H701916) is a 3-3/8 in diameter Logging Equipment Head rated to

400 degF, 20 Kpsi. LEH-QC has 31 pin connectors at the box type lower head. It
is simply an LEH-QB (obsolete) with an extended torpedo section. The torpedo
is lengthened to allow more room for making up the BCC-C connections, and
to allow easier make up to the new, less expensive, re-designed BRT-AQ. The
LEH-QC torpedo also uses a cone-type steel boot instead of the spring boot, as
on LEH-QB. LEH-QC is the standard LEH head without tension.
The LEH-QC addresses field complaints and suggestions about problems with
the existing EQCS-41 torpedo in the older and now obsolete LEH-Q and QB.
The complaints have centered mainly around the perception that the existing
EQCS-41 is too short, does not allow enough room to work in, and requires the
use of the spring boot. Some locations have cut rope socket conductors shorter
to accommodate the short length of the torpedo. The extended torpedo should
answer all of these problems.
LEH-QC accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in Appendix Y, Heads Manual,

Vol. 2.
Convert LEH-Q or QB to LEH-QC with kit H701915. The tension head, LEH-QT,
will be sold with the extended torpedo. The LEH-QC may also be modified with
either the oil-filled kit (H701470) or the tension kit (H710450).
Private
3.3.6.1 Using Coil Spring Boots in LEH-QC

A LEH-QC can be converted to run like the old, obsolete LEH-QB that has coil
spring boots, instead of the cone steel boots by replacing the parts listed in the
table below. This option will shorten the torpedo by 1 in. The replacement parts
are available as parts of an EQCS-41 Torpedo Quick Change kit (H245165).
Table 3-13: Replacement Parts to use the Coil Spring Boots in LEH-QC
Replacement Part Qty Replace with

Housing Weldment 1 H701897 H245023
Outer Housing 1 H701907 H329674
Fishing Bell Extension 1 H701908 H407214
Coil spring boots are available for various cable sizes:
Table 3-14: Coil Spring Boots for Various Cable Sizes
Replacement Part Cable Size

H222214 7-46
H701911 7-52, 7-53
H701912 1-32, 2-32
H701913 1-25
H701914 7-39, 1-42
In addition, the head lead length is slightly shorter than in the regular LEH-QC
due to the shortened torpedo. Cut the wires to 14-3/4 in long. Wrap the head
leads around the weakpoint so that the boot ends are located 2-1/4 in from the
face of the weakpoint head.
3.3.6.2 LEH-Q/QB Conversion to LEH-QC

A LEH-Q (H245163) can be converted to a LEH-QC using an Extended Torpedo
(H701915) and H701945 (plastic feedthroughs).
A LEH-QB (H701982) can be converted to a LEH-QC by using an Extended

Torpedo (H701915).
3.3.6.3 LEH-QC Upgrade from 400 to 500 degF

LEH-QC temperature rating can be upgraded to 500 degF (260 degC) by
replacing the parts listed in the table below.
Private
Table 3-15: LEH-QC Upgrade from 400 to 500 degF (204 to 260 degC)
Replacement 400 degF (204 degC), 20 Kpsi 500 degF (260 degC), 20 Kpsi
Qty
O-ring –
12 B012416 Viton B041024 Chemraz
Feedthrough
O-ring -
Thermometer 4 B011870 Viton B041754 Chemraz
carrier
Boot 20 H400313 Viton H231596 Kalrez
550 degF (288 550 degF (288
Downhole H122757 H122757
17 ft degC) degC)
Hook-up Wire
Use H122757 for any operations
Use a 400 degF (204 degC) Use a 500 degF (260 degC)
Weakpoint 1
rated weakpoint rated weakpoint
200 – 500
60 - 330 degF
H239552 H239553 degF (93 - 260
(16 - 166 degC)
degC)
400 - 650 degF
200 - 500 degF
H239553 H239554 (204 - 343
(93 - 260 degC)
degC)
Thermometer 3
90 - 260 degC
15 -165 degC
H327833 H327834 (194 -
(59 - 329 degF)
500 degF)
90 -260 degC 200 - 350
H327834 (194 - 500 H327835 degC (392 -
degF) 662 degF)
Mystik JT-6 Hi Temp
Multi-purpose grease (B039178)
Recommended
Grease on Krytox GPL-206
– Lubriplate grease (B013366)
O-rings and grease(B039179)
Backup rings
Note
Feedthrough connectors (H701353) will function at 500 degF (260 degC) but
maybe difficult to remove.
3.3.7 LEH-QT
The LEH-QT (H701460) is a 3-3/8 in diameter Logging Equipment Head with
Tension rated to 400 degF (204 degC), 20 Kpsi. LEH-QT has 31 pin connectors
at the box type lower head. LEH-QT is a modified LEH-QC with downhole
Private
tension measurement using a loadcell and an ECRD option. LEH-QT also uses
slightly longer small-body feedthroughs for head conductor connections than
does the LEH-QC. All other parts of the LEH-QT are common to the LEH-QC.
LEH-QT provides downhole tension measurements using a dry loadcell as listed

in Table . A Wet Loadcell (350 degF, 20 Kpsi, H352106) was used in LEH-QT but
it has been replaced by a Dry Loadcell. The standard Dry Loadcell (100323783)
is rated at 400 degF (204 degC) and 20K psi. HTHP Dry Loadcell Assembly (500
degF [260 degC], 30 Kpsi, 100807928) is available for LEH-QT as an optional
equipment.
The power and signal to and from the tension sensor is passed through the 31
pin adapter, the 5 pin connector and then to the sensor itself. Signal processing
and excitation voltage are supplied from any telemetry cartridge that is capable
of supplying excitation voltage to the Loadcell and processing the signal such as
TCC-B (MR6), DTC or EDTC.
LEH-QT accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in Appendix Y, Heads Manual,

Vol. 2. An ECRD can be run on the LEH-QT as optional equipment. For more
4324935).
3.3.7.1 Dry Load Cell

Dry Loadcell Assembly (100323783) is rated to 400 degF (204 degC), 20K
psi, and is capable of directly measuring the tensile load on the weakpoint. It
consists of a four-arm strain gage bridge that is mounted on the inner diameter
of the tensile stud. It has a network of resistors that compensate for the effects
of pressure and temperature.
It was designed to replace the Wet Loadcell assembly (H352106, Obsolete)

rated to 350 degF (177 degC), 20K psi, that incorporated a sputter deposit strain
element (H701463) located inside an oil-filled pressure compensated housing
assembly.
Wet Loadcells had the following design issues.

• The strain element (H701463) was sensitive to contaminants in the oil that
could take place in downhole condition.
• An intensive maintenance program was required to replace sealing
components.
• The reliability of the strain element had become questionable, leading to an
overwhelming refurbishment program through the product center. The issue
was partially affected by the abilities of the supplier of the previous strain
element.
Private
Dry Loadcells have the following benefits over Wet Loadcells.

• The Loadcell is “dry” (i.e. no internal oil reservoir) which eliminates several of
the drawbacks of the Wet Loadcell configuration.
• The Loadcell assembly is a welded system that is not oil compensated.

Therefore, there is no sensitivity of the loadcell to contamination because the
internal strain element is completely isolated from the borehole fluid.
• The loadcell assembly is pre-assembled and calibrated therefore it reduced
the assembly time through manufacturing and does not require routine
maintenance at the field level. If the loadcell assembly requires warranty
works or repairs, the field location must request a RAN number and return
the DLC's to Technology Center via InTouch. This will assure that the DLC's
are being repaired and returned in a timely manner.
The Dry Loadcell Assembly (100323783) uses the same retaining nut (H701311)
and the loadcell extension rod (100481339) as Wet Loadcell Assembly
(H352106) but does not require a spring (H352107) since the assembly is not
a non-compensated system.
The Dry Loadcell must be ordered through SWPS as an assembly (100323783)

that includes the Dry Loadcell (100353269) and the loadcell extension rod
(100481339).
Dry Loadcell Assembly (500 degF (260 degC), 30 Kpsi, 100807928) is available
for LEH-QT as an optional equipment.
Figure 3-11: Dry Load Cell Assembly - 100323783
3.3.7.2 LEH-Q/ QB/ QC Conversion to LEH-QT

A LEH-Q/QB/QC can be converted to a LEH-QT using Tension Head kit
LHTK-AA (H701450).
3.3.7.3 LEH-QT Upgrade from 400 to 500 degF (204 to 260 degC)
LEH-QT temperature rating can be upgraded to 500 degF (260 degC) using
the High Temp Kit (H395953).
Private
3.3.8 LEH-QE
The LEH-QE (100055779) is a 3-3/8 in diameter Logging Equipment Head

without Tension rated to 400 degF (204 degC), 20 Kpsi. LEH-QE has 31 pin
connectors at the box type lower head. It is a modified LEH-QC that can use
an ECRD.
LEH-QE accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in the Weakpoints Appendix,

Heads Manual, Vol. 2. An ECRD can be run on the LEH-QE as optional
equipment. For more details, refer to ECRD-E/F Operations and Maintenance
Manual (InTouch # 4324935).
3.3.8.1 Using Coil Spring Boots in LEH-QE

A LEH-QE can be converted to run like the old, obsolete LEH-QB that has coil
spring boots, instead of the cone steel boots, by replacing the parts listed in
Table Table 3-13: Replacement Parts to use the Coil Spring Boots in LEH-QC.
This option will shorten the torpedo by 1 in. The replacement parts are available
as parts of an EQCS-41 Torpedo Quick Change kit (H245165).
Private
3.3.8.2 LEH-QE Upgrade From 400 degF to 500 degF (260 degC)
LEH-QE temperature rating can be upgraded to 500 degF (260 degC) by

replacing the parts listed in the table below.
Table 3-16: LEH-QE upgrade from 400 degF to 500 degF (260 degC)
Replacement 400 degF, 20 Kpsi 500 degF (260 degC), 20 Kpsi

Qty
O-ring on the
dummy load cell
O-ring –
Feedthrough
O-ring -
Thermometer 4 B011870 Viton B041754 Chemraz
carrier
Boot 20 H400313 Viton H231596 Kalrez
Downhole H122757 550 degF H122757 550 degF

20 ft
Hook-up Wire Use H122757 for any operations
Use a 400 degF rated Use a 500 degF (260 degC)
Weakpoint 1
weakpoint rated weakpoint
200 – 500 degF
H239552 60 - 330 degF H239553
(260 degC)
200 – 500 degF
Thermometer 3 H239553 H239554 400 – 650 degF
(260 degC)
H327833 15 -165 degC H327834 90 -260 degC
H327834 90 -260 degC H327835 200-350 degC
grease (B039178)
Recommended
Grease on
– Lubriplate grease (B013366) Krytox GPL-206 grease(B039179)
O-rings and
Backup rings
3.3.9 LEH-ST
The LEH-ST (H351344) is a 2-1/2 in diameter Logging Equipment Head with
Tension rated to 400 degF, 20 Kpsi. LEH-ST has 31 pin connectors at the box
type lower head. It is designed to be used with the SLIM tool string. It contains
the extended torpedo which is standard on the tension heads. The head can be
used as an insulated head with BRT-BA bridle or as a non insulated cable head.
Private
It is similar to the standard tension cable head LEH-QT. Many common parts are
used on this head from the LEH family of cable heads to reduce cost and keep
part count down. It contains the extended torpedo like the other LEH heads.
It provides downhole tension measurements using a Wet Loadcell Assembly (400

degF, 20 Kpsi, H351342). To monitor downhole tension measurements, LEH-ST
must be run with a telemetry cartridge such as TCC-B (MR6), DTC or EDTC
with an AH-197 (2-1/2 in to 3-3/8 in, 31 sockets to 31-pin, 400 degF, 20 Kpsi,
H351323) or STGC (2-1/2 in, SlimAccess, STGC with STGH, 300 degF, 14 Kpsi).
LEH-ST requires the same software and hardware setup as the LEH-QT. The
same operating and logging principles apply to the LEH-ST as apply to the
LEH-QT.
LEH-ST accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in the Weakpoints Appendix,

Heads Manual, Vol. 2. An ECRD can be run on the LEH-ST as optional
3.3.10 LEH-QO
Note
For additional details see InTouch Announcement 5924419.
The LEH-QO (H360020) is a 3-3/8-in diameter, Oil Filled Logging Equipment

Head rated to 400 degF, 20 Kpsi. LEH-QOhas 31 pin connectors at the box
type lower head. The purpose of the oil-filled head (OFH) is to improve the
reliability of the booted feedthrough connection, where most head leaks
occur. This connection is surrounded in insulating silicone oil in the OFH. By
eliminating conductive borehole fluids around the feedthrough, head leaks are
greatly reduced. At this point, the boots become a fully redundant seal for
the feedthrough connection. The oil-filled chamber is pressure compensated.
Sealing around the head leads is accomplished by an elastomeric packoff, with
adjustable squeeze. The head contains the new plastic feedthroughs.
The oil-filled head has been field tested with high power tools, such as MSCT,
MDT, RFT, mainly at temperatures above 300 degF, with no failures. It is
recommended to use the LEH-QO in the most demanding environments, which
occur with high power tools, run in deep, hot, heavy mud wells. An LEH head
may not be modified with both oil-filled kit and the tension kit at once.
Private
LEH-QO accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in the Weakpoints Appendix,

Heads Manual, Vol. 2.
LEH-QC can be modified to LEH-QO by ordering kit LEHK-AA (H701470).

3.3.11 LEH-RC
Note
The LEH-RC (H713338) is a 2-3/4 in diameter Logging Equipment Head rated to

400 degF, 20 Kpsi. LEH-RC has 29 pin connectors at the box type lower head,
used in combination with the 2-3/4in, 29-pin tools.
It was designed to replace the LEH-R (H245164, obsolete) with following

improvements over LEH-R.
• Reliability (uses small body plastic fluid-to-air connectors).
• Substantial cost reductions in both asset cost and M & S costs.
• Maintainability (easier to maintain and change out due to longer torpedo).
LEH-RC accommodates rigid weakpoints as listed in the Weakpoints Appendix,

Heads Manual, Vol. 2. An ECRD can be run on the LEH-RC as an optional
3.3.11.1 LEH-R Conversion to LEH-RC
Note
LEH-R can be converted to LEH-RC using upgrade kit (Plastic Feedthrus, LEH-R
to LEH-RC, H701464), which includes a new machined lower head, complete
with all fluid-to-air connectors and blank-off plugs installed. The upgrade kit
does not contain the extended torpedo. This kit is the 2-3/4 in equivalent to
the upgrade kit (H701945) offered for 3-3/8 in LEH-Q heads. To include the
extended torpedo, use the upgrade kit (H701915).
Private
3.3.11.2 LEH-RC Upgrade from 400 degF to 500 degF (260 degC)
LEH-RC temperature rating can be upgraded to 500 degF (260 degC) by

replacing the parts listed in Table 3-15: LEH-QC Upgrade from 400 to 500 degF
(204 to 260 degC).
3.3.12 Kits and Combinations of Logging Equipment

Heads
Kits and combination of logging equipment heads are listed in the table below.
Table 3-17: Kits and Combinations
Kits and Combinations Results

LEH-Q (H245163) + H701945 (plastic feedthroughs) + H701915 LEH-QC (H701916)
(extended torpedo) =
LEH-R (H245164) + H701464 (plastic feedthroughs) + H701915 LEH-RC (H713338)
(extended torpedo) =
LEH-QB (H701982) + H701915 (extended torpedo) = LEH-QC (H701916)
LEH-Q/QB + LEHK-AA, H701470 (oil filling kit) = LEH-QO (H360020)
To convert LEH-QC, H701916 to LEH-RC, H713338, the folllowing must
be replaced:
• H329672 with H329702 Bulkhead to head adapter
• H701309 with H231888 Head 2-3/4 in, 12 Pin
• H251929 with H231073 Thread protector
• B012828 with B024015 O-ring, SZ 2-135 Viton 75D
LEH-R/RC + H318173 (CRS kit) = LEH-W
LEH-W + H318174 + H701915 + H701464 = LEH-RC
LEH-Q/QB/QC + LHTK-AA, H701450 = LEH-QT (H701460)
LEH-QT (H701460) + H395953 (hi-temp kit) = LEH-HT (H356846)
TDC-B Tension Device Calibrator (H441254) + H713131 = TDC-C (H713140)
Private
4-i Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Operations, Disassembly and Assembly 4-i
4 Operations, Disassembly and Assembly

4.1 MH-22 __________________________________________________________ 4-1
4.2 MH-32 __________________________________________________________ 4-5

4.2.1 MH-32 Special Tools _________________________________________ 4-5
4.2.2 MH-32 Disassembly __________________________________________ 4-6
4.2.3 MH-32 Assembly ____________________________________________ 4-6
4.3 PEH-AB ________________________________________________________ 4-6
4.3.1 PEH-AB Disassembly _______________________________________ 4-6
4.3.1.1 Cable to Head Disassembly ______________________________ 4-6
4.3.1.2 Thread Ring Disassembly ________________________________ 4-7
4.3.1.3 Bell Housing (H108135) Disassembly _____________________ 4-7
4.3.1.4 Feedthrough Connector (H701185) Disassembly ___________ 4-7
4.3.1.5 Modular Weakpoint Disassembly _________________________ 4-8
4.3.2 PEH-AB Assembly __________________________________________ 4-8
4.3.2.1 Precautions _____________________________________________ 4-8
4.3.2.2 Modular Weakpoint Assembly (H441734) __________________ 4-9
4.3.2.3 Feedthrough Connectors (H701185) _____________________ 4-11
4.3.2.4 Threaded Ring (H026236) _______________________________ 4-13
4.3.2.5 Head Wire Assembly (PEH-AB) __________________________ 4-13
4.3.2.6 Bell Housing (H251881) _________________________________ 4-15
4.3.2.7 Cable to Head Assembly ________________________________ 4-16
4.4 PEH-E _________________________________________________________ 4-17
4.4.1 PEH-E Disassembly ________________________________________ 4-17
4.4.1.1 Torpedo Disassembly ___________________________________ 4-17
4.4.1.2 Upper Head Disassembly _______________________________ 4-17
4.4.1.3 Lower Head Disassembly (PEH-E) _______________________ 4-17
4.4.2 PEH-E Assembly ___________________________________________ 4-18
4.4.2.1 Precautions ____________________________________________ 4-18
4.4.2.2 Lower Head Assembly __________________________________ 4-19
4.4.2.3 Head Assembly _________________________________________ 4-20
4.5 PEH-EFA ______________________________________________________ 4-21
4.6 PEH-KD _______________________________________________________ 4-23
4.7 PEH-L ________________________________________________________ 4-23
4.8 PEK-BB _______________________________________________________ 4-23
4.8.1 PEK-BB Disassembly _______________________________________ 4-23
4.8.2 PEK-BB Assembly __________________________________________ 4-24
4.8.3 Makeup Procedure to MH-22/ PEH-E/ PEH-EF/ EFA __________ 4-24
4.8.3.1 Makeup Procedure to MH-22/ PEH-E _____________________ 4-24
4.8.3.2 Makeup Procedure to MH-22/ PEH-EF/ EFA ______________ 4-25
4.9 PEK-BC _______________________________________________________ 4-25
4.9.1 PEK-BC Disassembly _______________________________________ 4-25
4.9.2 PEK-BC Assembly __________________________________________ 4-25
4.10 PEK-BD _______________________________________________________ 4-26
4.11 PEK-BE _______________________________________________________ 4-28
4.12 PEK-E _________________________________________________________ 4-30
Private
4-ii Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Operations, Disassembly and Assembly 4-ii
4.12.1 PEK-E Disassembly _________________________________________ 4-30

4.12.2 PEK-E Assembly ___________________________________________ 4-30
4.13 PEK-F _________________________________________________________ 4-30
4.14 LEH-AA _______________________________________________________ 4-32
4.14.1 Disassembly of LEH-AA, Lower Head Housing ________________ 4-32

4.14.2 Disassembly of LEH-AA, Lower Head/ RTD Sub-assembly ____ 4-33
4.14.3 LEH-AA Assembly, Lower Head/ RTD Sub-assembly __________ 4-33
4.14.4 LEH-AA Assembly, Lower Head Housing _____________________ 4-35
4.15 LEH-HT _______________________________________________________ 4-37
4.15.1 LEH-HT Disassembly and Assembly _________________________ 4-37
4.15.2 LEH-HT Operations - MaxWell Job Execution _________________ 4-38
4.15.2.1 Software Operation: Equipment Setup ____________________ 4-38
4.15.2.2 Software Operation: HTEN Calibration ____________________ 4-39
4.15.2.3 Software Operation: Log/Data Acquisition _________________ 4-41
4.15.2.4 Software Operation: Processing __________________________ 4-42
4.15.2.5 MaxWell – OP Differences _______________________________ 4-42
4.16 LEH-MT _______________________________________________________ 4-43
4.16.1 LEH-MT Disassembly and Assembly _________________________ 4-43
4.16.2 LEH-MT Operations- Maxwell Job Execution __________________ 4-43
4.16.2.1 Software Operation: Equipment Setup ____________________ 4-43
Equipment and Computation Manager ________________ 4-44
HTEN Parameter Settings ____________________________ 4-44
Weak Point Configuration ____________________________ 4-44
Software Operation: HTEN Calibration ________________ 4-44
Software Operation: Log/Data Acquisition _____________ 4-46
Software Operation: Processing ______________________ 4-48
MaxWell – OP Differences ____________________________ 4-48
4.17 LEH-PT ________________________________________________________ 4-49
4.17.1 LEH-PT Disassembly _______________________________________ 4-49
4.17.1.1 Remove the Cable to Head Assembly ____________________ 4-49
4.17.1.2 Remove the Thermometers ______________________________ 4-50
4.17.1.3 Remove the Fishing Bell (H351343) ______________________ 4-50
4.17.1.4 Remove the Head Lead Wires ___________________________ 4-51
4.17.1.5 Remove the Weakpoint Assembly (H245012/ 100926943) _ 4-51
4.17.1.6 Remove the Split Threaded Ring (H350383) ______________ 4-52
4.17.1.7 Remove Bulkhead to Head Adapter Assembly (T5013553) 4-52
4.17.1.8 Remove the Loadcell Assembly (T5013560) ______________ 4-52
4.17.1.9 Remove the Ten Feed-thru's (T5011962) _________________ 4-52
4.17.1.10 Disassemble the Bulkhead Assembly ____________________ 4-53
4.17.1.11 Disassemble the Loadcell (T5013560) ____________________ 4-54
4.17.2 LEH-PT Assembly __________________________________________ 4-56
4.17.2.1 Tools Required __________________________________________ 4-56
4.17.2.2 Bulkhead to Head Adapter (T5013553) ___________________ 4-57
4.17.2.3 Prepare the Loadcell Assembly (T5013560) _______________ 4-62
4.17.2.4 Prepare the Fishing Bell (H351343) _______________________ 4-72
4.17.2.5 Prepare the Weakpoint Assembly ________________________ 4-73
Private
4-iii Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Operations, Disassembly and Assembly 4-iii
4.17.2.6 Prepare the Head Leads _________________________________ 4-74

4.17.2.7 Prepare the Lower 31-pin Head (T5013557) _______________ 4-75
4.17.2.8 Assembling the Bulkhead Assembly (T5013553) __________ 4-76
4.17.2.9 Installing the Loadcell Assembly (T5013560) _____________ 4-78
4.17.2.10 Assembling Weakpoint Assembly onto Loadcell Assembly _ 4-79

4.17.2.11 Assembling the Fishing Bell (H351343) ___________________ 4-81
4.17.2.12 Verify Head Insulation Resistance ________________________ 4-82
4.17.2.13 Install Outer Housing and Fishing Bell Extension __________ 4-82
4.17.3 LEH-PT Operations _________________________________________ 4-83
4.17.3.1 Equipment and Materials ________________________________ 4-83
4.17.3.2 Tool Checklist __________________________________________ 4-83
4.17.3.3 Software Set-Up ________________________________________ 4-83
4.17.3.4 Maxwell Job Execution __________________________________ 4-84
Software Operation: Equipment Setup ________________ 4-84
Software Operation: HTEN Calibration ________________ 4-85
Software Operation: Log/Data Acquisition _____________ 4-86
Software Operation: Processing ______________________ 4-87
Maxwell – OP Differences ____________________________ 4-88
4.17.3.5 Performing Job Operations ______________________________ 4-88
4.17.3.6 Post Job (Rig Down) Instructions ________________________ 4-89
4.17.4 LEH-PT Troubleshooting ____________________________________ 4-89
4.18 LEH-QC _______________________________________________________ 4-90
4.18.1 LEH-QC Disassembly _______________________________________ 4-90
4.18.1.1 LEH-QC Cable to Head Disassembly ____________________ 4-90
4.18.1.2 Disassembly of Bulkhead to Head Adapter (H329672) _____ 4-92
4.18.2 LEH-QC Assembly __________________________________________ 4-93
4.18.2.1 LEH-QC Head Assembly ________________________________ 4-93
4.18.2.2 Bulkhead to Head Adapter Assembly (H329672) __________ 4-99
4.18.2.3 Attaching the Cable to the Head ________________________ 4-101
4.18.2.4 Torpedo Assembly to LEH-QC Logging Head ____________ 4-101
4.19 LEH-QE ______________________________________________________ 4-103
4.19.1 LEH-QE Disassembly ______________________________________ 4-103
4.19.2 LEH-QE Assembly _________________________________________ 4-103
4.20 LEH-QT ______________________________________________________ 4-104
4.20.1 Operations- Maxwell Job Execution _________________________ 4-104
4.20.1.1 Software Operation: Equipment Setup ___________________ 4-104
4.20.1.2 Software Operation: HTEN Calibration ___________________ 4-105
4.20.1.3 Software Operation: Log/Data Acquisition ________________ 4-106
4.20.1.4 Software Operation: Processing _________________________ 4-107
4.20.1.5 MaxWell – OP Differences ______________________________ 4-108
4.20.2 Troubleshooting guide ______________________________________ 4-108
4.21 LEH-ST _______________________________________________________ 4-110
4.21.1 LEH-ST Disassembly ______________________________________ 4-110
4.21.1.1 Disassemble the LEH-ST Cable to Head _________________ 4-111
4.21.1.2 Disassemble the Bulkhead to Head Adapter (H351340) __ 4-113
4.21.1.3 Disassemble the Loadcell Assembly (H351342). __________ 4-114
Private
4-iv Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Operations, Disassembly and Assembly 4-iv
4.21.2 LEH-ST Assembly _________________________________________ 4-117

4.21.2.1 LEH-ST Head Assembly _______________________________ 4-117
4.21.2.2 Bulkhead to Head Adapter Assembly (H351340) _________ 4-123
4.21.2.3 Attaching the Cable to the Head ________________________ 4-124
4.21.2.4 Torpedo Assembly to LEH-ST Logging Head ____________ 4-125

4.21.3 Operations- Maxwell Job Execution _________________________ 4-127
4.21.3.1 Software Operation: Equipment Setup ___________________ 4-127
4.21.3.2 Software Operation: HTEN Calibration ___________________ 4-128
4.21.3.3 Software Operation: Log/Data Acquisition ________________ 4-129
4.21.3.4 Software Operation: Processing _________________________ 4-130
4.21.3.5 MaxWell – OP Differences ______________________________ 4-131
4.22 LEH-QO ______________________________________________________ 4-132
4.22.1 LEH-QO Assembly _________________________________________ 4-132
4.23 LEH-RC ______________________________________________________ 4-132
4.23.1 LEH-RC Disassembly ______________________________________ 4-132
4.23.2 LEH-RC Assembly _________________________________________ 4-132
4.24 Hook-up Wire Installation for the ECRD ______________________ 4-132
4.25 Fishing _______________________________________________________ 4-135
4.25.1 Fishing Method ____________________________________________ 4-135
4.25.2 Pulling Weakpoint __________________________________________ 4-136
Private
4-1 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Operations, Disassembly and Assembly 4-1
Operations, Disassembly and

Assembly
4.1 MH-22
Refer to the MH-22 Rebuild (shooting bridle) — Operator SWI and CTA, InTouch
content #: 6245550.
Private
Spirol pin Hex collar Thrust ring Spirol pin (2) Bell housing
B013813 H034903 H230460 B013392 H030798 Lower head
subassembly
Private
H122373
1-3/8 monocable
Key O-ring Set screw Lock ring Insulator head
H030772 B013113 B013811 H030474 H125979 H030464
Thread protector
(not shown)
H122375
Figure 4-1: Disassembly of the MH-22 - H030796

Connector Spirol pin Sleeve O-ring
H701182 B015067 H036384 B011968
Tubing
E050913

Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Operations, Disassembly and Assembly
4-2
Table 4-1: Spider Weak Point Strengths, EH713123, Table 1 of 5
1
Cable Type 1-18 P/ZT 1-20 ZT1 1-22 P/ZT
Armor Type GIPS 12 x 15 GIPS 10 x 16 GIPS 11 x 15

Outer Inner 2 3
Strength Nut Torque Strength2 Nut Torque Strength Nut Torque
wires wires
(lbs) (in-lbf) (lbs) (in-lbf) (lbs) (in-lbf)
Quantity Quantity
3 3 600 150 640 160 1060 195
4 3 750 180 800 190 1260 230
5 3 900 205 960 220 1460 260
6 3 1050 235 1120 250 1660 295
7 3 1200 260 1280 280 1865 325
8 3 1350 290 1440 310 2065 360
9 3 - - - - 2265 390
1
No Experimental data available on these cable types. Break strengths are not adjusted per 12/93 model. Future testing
planned.
2
±25%
3
±15%
Cable Type 1-22 ZT 1-22 ZT 1-23/2-23 P/ZT
Armor Type Multiphase 11 x 15 Vectorloy 11 x 15 GIPS & Multiphase 12x18
Outer Inner 1
Strength Nut Torque Strength1 Nut Torque Strength1 Nut Torque
wires wires
Quantity Quantity
3 3 1125 195 970 195 995 170
4 3 1335 230 1155 230 1160 200
5 3 1550 260 1340 260 1325 230
6 3 1760 295 1525 295 1490 255
7 3 1975 325 1710 325 1655 285
8 3 2190 360 1890 360 1820 315
9 3 2400 390 2075 390 1990 340
10 3 - - - - 2155 370
11 3 - - - - 2320 400
1
±15%
Private
Cable Type 1-23/2-23 ZT 1-25 P/ZT 2-23 P/ZT
Armor Type HC265 12 x 18 GIPS 12 x 18 GIPS & Multiphase 13 x19

Outer Inner 1
Strength Nut Torque Strength1 Nut Torque Strength1 Nut Torque
wires wires
Quantity Quantity
3 3 975 170 1205 180 915 160
4 3 1135 200 1405 225 1070 190
5 3 1300 230 1605 270 1220 220
6 3 1460 255 1805 315 1375 250
7 3 1625 285 2005 360 1525 280
8 3 1785 315 2205 405 1680 310
9 3 1950 340 2410 450 1835 340
10 3 2110 370 - - - -
11 3 2275 400 - - - -
1
±15%
Cable Type 1-25ZA/ZT XXS1 1-32ZA/ZT XS1 2-32ZA HC1 2-32ZA/ZT XS1 2-32ZT HPC1
Armor Type XXS 12 x 18 XS 12 x 18 HC265 12 x 18 XS 12 x 18 XS 17 x 23
Outer Inner Strength2Nut Strength2Nut Strength2Nut Strength2Nut Strength2Nut

Wire Wire Torque Torque Torque Torque Torque
Quantity Quantity lbs In-lbf lbs In-lbf lbs In-lbf lbs In-lbf lbs In-lbf
2 3 1091 1517 1384 1517 1091
3 3 1310 180 1820 200 1660 200 1820 200 1310 180
4 3 1528 225 2123 250 1937 250 2123 250 1528 225
5 3 1746 270 2427 300 2214 300 2427 300 1746 270
6 3 1964 315 2730 350 2491 350 2730 350 1964 315
7 3 2183 360 3033 400 2767 400 3033 400 2183 360
8 3 2401 405 3337 450 3044 450 3337 450 2401 405
9 3 2619 450 3640 500 3321 500 3640 500 2619 450
10 3 2837 3943 3598 3943 2837
11 3 3056 4247 3874 4247 3056
1No Experimental data available on these cable types. Break Strengths not adjusted per 12/93 model.
2+/- 15%
Private
1
Cable Type 2-23 ZT 1-32/2-32 P/ZT 1-42 ZB/ZH
Armor Type Vectorloy 13 x 19 GIPS 12 x 18 Shooting Bridle

Outer Inner 2 3
Strength Nut Torque Strength2 Nut Torque Strength Nut Torque
wires wires
Quantity Quantity
3 3 780 160 1720 200 2280 380
4 3 910 190 2005 250 3000 400
5 3 1040 220 2295 300 3550 420
6 3 1170 250 2580 350 4060 440
7 3 1300 280 2870 400 4600 460
8 3 1430 310 3155 450 5100 480
9 3 1560 340 3440 500 - -

1
No Experimental data available on these cable types. Break strengths not adjusted per 12/93 model. Future testing planned.
2
±15%
3
±25%
Table 4-6: Feedthrough Connectors Used with the MH-22
Pressure
Temp Rating
Connector Rating Remarks
(degF)
(kpsi)
H256581 (opt.) 500 25 Use B023671 backup ring
H701182 (std.) 500 20 Most reliable electrically
4.2 MH-32
4.2.1 MH-32 Special Tools

Table 4-7: MH-32 Special Tools
Tool Description Part Number

Punch, Drive Pin 3/16 x 8 B015262
Punch, Drive Pin 1/8 x 4 B016963
Torque Wrench, 100-750 in/lb, 3.8 Ratchet, 13/16 B034859
Crowfoot
Gun, Heat 750-800°F, 120 V AC, 6 ft. Cord, and E050651
Attachments
Ring, Centering H701896
Private
4.2.2 MH-32 Disassembly

The MH-32 Dissasembly procedure is similar to the one for the MH-22. Refer
to the MH-22 Diassembly section of this manual and the MH-32, 1-11/16 in
Monocable Head Assembly Drawing (H353637).
4.2.3 MH-32 Assembly

The MH-32 (H353637) Assembly procedure is similar to the one for the MH-22.
Refer to the the MH-22 Assembly section of this manual and the MH-32, 1-11/16
in Monocable Head Assembly Drawing (H353637).
Note
During assembly, leave two 6-in lengths of armor wire for the ground connection.
Trim the conductor length to 2.3-in (as opposed to 7.0-in for the MH-22), before
making up the BCC connections.
4.3 PEH-AB
4.3.1 PEH-AB Disassembly
4.3.1.1 Cable to Head Disassembly

Refer to drawing H222893.
1. Remove steel boot (H121961) by removing roll pin and Allen screws.
2. Remove the roll pin (B015303) from fishing bell (H407534).
3. Unscrew the fishing bell using (B003984) spanner wrench.
4. Slide the fishing bell up cable, being careful to support torpedo assembly
during removal.
5. Remove Truarc ring (B013404) and retainer collar (H031706) from split
torpedo.
6. Remove the cushion (H105309).
7. Part the Torpedo housing and BCC connections using the connector
disengage tool (H245789).
Private
4.3.1.2 Thread Ring Disassembly


1. Remove the two O-rings (B011316) from the head (H113301).
2. Pry up snap ring (H026240) with a small screwdriver and remove.
3. Remove both halves of split ring spacer (H026239).
4. Pry out both halves of the split ring (H026238).
5. Slide the thread ring (H026236) off the head (H113301).
4.3.1.3 Bell Housing (H108135) Disassembly

1. Unlock the lock ring (H026233) with a suitable punch. If the lock ring is cut,
replace it.
2. Unscrew the bell housing (H108135) with a spanner wrench and remove it.
(Do not allow the housing to drop on the thread end. Damage to feedthrough
connectors can occur).
3. Unplug BCC connectors from the feedthrough connectors using boot
extractor (H245845).
Note
Slip boot retainer (100593948) back before unplugging connector.
4.3.1.4 Feedthrough Connector (H701185) Disassembly
1. Unscrew the connector rod sleeve (H029063) with connector wrench

(H122201).
2. Unscrew the hex nut (B012886) with the connector wrench.
3. Remove washer (H030142), insulator (H006766), spring (H222296), and
moisture stop O-ring (B024538) from connector.
4. Gently push the feedthrough connector so that it comes out the uphole side
of head (H113301). Use care to avoid damage to threads, heat shrink coating
or insulator when removing feedthrough.
Private
4.3.1.5 Modular Weakpoint Disassembly

With the weakpoint head (H701977) still screwed into head (H113301) perform
the following.
1. Remove the connector (H407681) and long compression spring (H701993).

2. Remove the weakpoint and short compression spring (H268749).
3. Remove the extension rod (H441418) and the other long compression spring
(H701993).
4. Place a 7/8-in deep socket wrench on the weakpoint head (H701977) and
unscrew. (Since the weakpoint head does not have to be removed to change
weakpoints, do not neglect this part for maintenance and replacement of
O-rings (B011404).)
Note
If using pliers during disassembly of modular weakpoint assembly, be sure
to remove any nicks and burrs with emery cloth or sandpaper prior to
replacement of head wires.
4.3.2 PEH-AB Assembly
4.3.2.1 Precautions
It is very important that the following precautions be observed:
1. For flexible weakpoints, use two (2) springs (H268749). Refer to drawing
H222893.
2. Spring B074383 can be used instead of H268749, especially at high
temperature.
3. Slotted spring (H222296) can be added to H268749 to improve contact of
line #10.
4. With a dial caliper or micrometer, confirm that the dimensions of the
anti-torque lug on the bell housing are as follows: 0.36-in wide, 0.50-in long,
and 0.18-in thick.
Private
a. If this lug is corroded or worn, replace the bell housing.

b. Ensure the connector (H407681) is properly adjusted to a 3/8-in gap
between the end of the bell housing (H108135) and the inside of the
connector (H407681).
c. If the gap is not adjusted properly, the anti-torque lug will not be properly
engaged with the split torpedo, which could allow rotation of the torpedo
assembly and result in a lost tool downhole. See note #2 on drawing
H222893.
5. When making up nut (B012886) on feedthrough, tighten nut finger tight, and
then add no more than 1/3 of a turn with wrench.
6. Do not forget the lock washer (H026233). Never use a lock washer (H026233)
that is cut, since it will not lock the head and bell housing together. A cut lock
washer can cause the weakpoint to unscrew and result in the loss of a tool.
7. The bell housing must be completely filled with any automotive chassis
grease or DC-111 grease (B021698).
8. Make sure the gap between weakpoint and weakpoint connector is filled
with USKORONA tape and with rubber tubing (B013679) to avoid pinching
wires by well pressure.
9. Use a GO/NOGO gauge (H123578) to adjust the crimping tool.
10. Tape the wires to the weakpoint in only one place, so as to allow wires to
move when connecting head to the cable.
11. Do not bend boots during taping of wires.
12. Check all new O-rings and backup rings (if any) for nicks, gouges, cuts or
tears. Discard any faulty rings.
4.3.2.2 Modular Weakpoint Assembly (H441734)

1. Coat two (2) O-rings (B011404) with silicone grease DC-111 (B021698)
before installation. Install two (2) O-rings (B011404) in the grooves on the
modular weakpoint head (H701977).
2. Install one compression spring (H-701993) into thread bore on modular
weakpoint head (H701977).
Private
3. Screw the extension rod (H441418) into weakpoint head past the nylon lock;
part should shoulder up.
4. Cover the threads and seal bore in the head (H113301) with Lubriplate
grease 930 AA (B013366).

5. Screw this assembly into the head using a 7/8-in deep socket wrench.
Inspection of these threads and seal bore must be done on every
disassembly and assembly.
6. Select the desired weakpoint from the weakpoint listings found in 8:
Weakpoints. Each modular weakpoint is supplied with two color-coded bands
for identifying weakpoints. One band is to be placed on the weakpoint, while
the other is to be placed over the weakpoint head (H701977), (on the air side,
#10 conductor) after installation into head (H113301).
7. Install one compression spring (H268749) into thread bore of extension rod
(H441418). Screw in the selected weakpoint.
8. Install one compression spring (H701993) into thread bore of connector
(H407681) and screw onto weakpoint. DO NOT TIGHTEN. See Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2: Modular weakpoint assembly (PEH-AB) with connector installed
9. Place lock ring (H026233) onto bell housing (H108135), and screw into head
(H113301) until it shoulders up.
10. Measure between the inside lip of connector (H407681) and outside lip of
bell housing (H108135), as shown in Figure 4-3. The measured gap should
be 3/8-in.
Private
HCS Sustaining Engineering\Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo\InTouch Content ID 3012542\4.0\Release Date:23-Mar-2018\EDMS UID: 275261732\Produced: 23-Mar-2018 04:07:36 4-11 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Operations, Disassembly and Assembly 4-11
Figure 4-3: Adjusting the connector gap
11. Tighten the connector (H407681) until the 3/8-in measurement is achieved.
12. Remove the bell housing and lock ring to continue assembly.
4.3.2.3 Feedthrough Connectors (H701185)
1. Select nine feedthrough connectors (H701185), and install two O-rings

(B013113) on each assembly. Coat the O-rings with DC-111 (B021698).
2. Use a clean rag to wipe the counter bores in each end of the nine connector
holes in the head (H113301).
a. Use caution to avoid scratching the O-ring sealing surface.
b. Do not use abrasive cleaners, or any material that may be harder than
the head material.
c. Ensure the O-ring sealing surface is clean, corrosion-free, and free of
scratches or gouges.
3. Insert one of the assembled rods into each of the feedthrough holes in the
head (the threaded part of connector on the downhole side of the head).
Private
4. Push each fluid to air connector into the head from the pressure side using
the nut driver section of connector wrench (H122201). Be careful not to
damage the boot sealing surface. See Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4: Installing plastic feedthrough connectors
5. Insert moisture stop O-ring (B024538), over the threaded end of the fluid to
air connector, followed by the spring (H222296), insulator (H006766), and
washer (H030142).
6. Pack the spring with silicone grease DC-111 before installation.
7. Install small pattern hex nut (B012886), and connector socket (H029063).
Private
8. Tighten the nut finger tight plus 1/3 turn.
Note
Do not let the nut turn while tightening the connector socket. Usethe
connector wrench (H122201).
4.3.2.4 Threaded Ring (H026236)
1. Coat the inside diameter of the threaded ring (H026236) with Lubriplate
grease 930 AA (B013366) and slide it on the head (H113301).
2. Coat both halves of the split ring (H026238) with Lubriplate grease 930 AA.
Place them in the groove on the head (H113301), and slide them back under
the end of the threaded ring.
3. Coat both halves of the split ring spacer (H026239) with Lubriplatee grease
930 AA.
4. Place them in the groove below the split ring, and snap the snap ring
(H026240) in the groove of the split ring spacer (H026239).
5. Install two O-rings (B011316) in the grooves on the head.
6. Coat the O-rings with silicone grease DC-111 (B021698), but do not get
DC-111 on the threaded ring.
7. Using Lubriplate 930 AA, lightly lubricate the threaded ring (H026236)
through the fitting machined next to the spanner wrench holes and on the
threads themselves.
4.3.2.5 Head Wire Assembly (PEH-AB)
1. Using downhole hook-up wire (H122757), cut from coil seven lengths of wire
22-in each. Cut ends at a 60 degree angle.
2. Install wire marker (E049581, on each wire #1-#7) Viton boot (H400313),
boot liner (H245765) and socket contact (H115576).
Private
3. Assemble the BCC-CC Viton female connection per EH400327 assembly

drawing on one end of conductor. (See the BCC section of this manual.)
4. Install booted conductors onto feedthrough connectors (H701185) numbers
1-7 using tool (H268423).

a. Make sure the boots are fully bottomed on the feedthrough.
b. Twist the boot slightly from side to side to remove any trapped air under
the boot.
c. Using a boot retainer/ extractor tool (H268423), push the boot retainer
(100593948) with the gas vent slot facing the feedthrough until it stops.
Figure 4-5: Long boot retainer (100593948) on BCC Make-Up
5. On the feedthrough connection for slot 8 and slot 9, install a blank female
boot (H400325), and slide the boot retainer (100593948) over it using the
boot retainer tool, (H268423) with the gas vent slot facing the feedthrough
until it stops.
Note
Before spiral wrapping wires around weakpoint assembly, inspect for burrs,
nicks, or any sharp edges that can nick conductors. If any are found, remove,
or wrap with Teflon tape (E018735).
6. Starting with #1 conductor, spiral wrap conductors around the weakpoint and
up through the holes in the connector (H407681).
a. Ensure the conductors are fed through the connector holes so as to be in
correct sequence 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 counterclockwise looking uphole.
b. Leave enough slack in the conductor so as to not put a bend or a kink
where the conductor leaves the female boot and first wraps around
weakpoint assembly, but not so much that the bell housing could snag or
hang it.
c. Tape conductors to weakpoint assembly using Teflon tape (E018735).
Private
7. Install wire marker (E049581, on each wire #1-#7) Viton boot (H400313),
liner (H245765), and socket contact (H115576). Assemble the female
connection per assembly drawing EH400327. Finished conductor length
should be 2-1/2 in from connector.
8. Build the ground conductor and attach it to connector (H407681) with brass
screw (B011979), lock washer (B018955), and terminal ring (E016031).
Note
Always use brass screw (B011979). If screw head breaks or corrodes, it's
easier to remove brass.
9. Check continuity and insulation. Verify the correct conductor distribution and
insulation in accordance with drawing H222893.
10. Verify that conductor resistance is less than 1.0 ohm from end to end.
11. Verify that insulation resistance is greater than 500 Mohm from each
conductor to mass.
12. Install blank-off plugs (H400320) into female boots.
13. Tape the female boots together.
4.3.2.6 Bell Housing (H251881)
1. With Lubriplate grease 930 AA (B013366), lubricate the threads of the bell
housing (H108135) and the head (H113301).
2. Make sure lock ring (H026233) is in place on the bell housing.
3. Bring the bell housing and the head together and tighten with spanner
wrenches (B003984).
4. Using a suitable punch, bend the lock ring into all of the slots provided on the
mating surfaces of both the bell housing and the head.
Note
Never use a lock ring which is cut since it will not lock the two pieces together.
5. Recheck continuity and insulation.
Private
6. Recheck the 3/8-in connector gap (H407681). During removal or installation

of the bell housing, the connector could rotate.
7. Install two O-rings (B011316) on head (H113301).
8. Install the thread protector (H109114).

9. Fill the bell housing cavity and head with DC-111 (B021698) or automotive
chassis grease through grease fitting (A013623).
4.3.2.7 Cable to Head Assembly
1. Slide fishing neck (H407534) over the rope socket and up cable.
2. Slide the Truarc ring (B013404) and retainer ring (H031706) over the rope
socket and up cable.
3. Make BCC-CC connections at rope socket per assembly instructions
EH400327.
4. Assemble the torpedo split halves (H105314).
a. Slide the retainer ring (H031706) in place on split halves.
b. Slide the Truarc ring (B013404) and lock in groove above retaining ring.
c. Slide Truarc ring (B013404) down and lock into ring groove.
5. Install the cushion (H105309).

a. Ensure the rubber cushion is between the split torpedo housing
(H105314) and bell housing (H108135).
b. When the bell housing extension (H407534) is tightened, the cushion
is squeezed in such a manner that looseness between the torpedo
housing and bell housing is eliminated and a slight preload is placed on
the weakpoint.
6. Slide the bell housing extension (H407534) up to the threads of bell housing
(H108135).
7. Lubricate threads with Lubriplate Grease 930 AA (B013366), and tighten with
spanner wrench (B003984).
8. Install roll pin (B015303) through the bell housing extension using a 3/16-in
punch.
9. Install the steel boot assembly (H121961).
Private
PEH-E
4.4
4.4.1 PEH-E Disassembly
4.4.1.1 Torpedo Disassembly
1. Remove the Allen screws from steel boot assembly and remove.
2. Remove the retaining ring (B013403) and retainer ring (H106465) and slide
up cable.
3. Remove the retaining ring (B017514) and slide up retainer ring (H106465).
4. Remove split halves (H106462) and part BCC boot connections using
connector disengage tool (H245789).
4.4.1.2 Upper Head Disassembly
1. Cut conductor wires to remove BCC boots.

2. Remove the split rings (H113585) and slide the upper housing (H113587) off
the head. Iinspect the upper housing for cracks.
3. Using an 1/8-in punch, remove the two spirol pins (B015067) from lower
housing (H113588).
4. Unscrew the lower housing (H113588) from the lower head (H122373).
5. Remove the weakpoint from lower housing and inspect for pitting or corrosion.
If pitting or corrosion exists or if the weakpoint has been pulled to 75% of its
break strength, replace the weakpoint with a new weakpoint upon assembly.
4.4.1.3 Lower Head Disassembly (PEH-E)

Private
1. Slide the boot retainer (100593948) off the female boot. Disconnect the BCC
connector from the feedthrough connector.
2. Remove the Allen screws (B013811) from head and remove grounding wire
conductors.
Note
Replace these set screws every time they are removed to maintain a good
ground connection.
3. Unscrew the connector rod sleeve (H036384) from the fluid-to-air connector
and remove insulator, (H125979).
4. Using the screwdriver section of connector wrench (H122201), press on the
threaded end of the fluid-to-air connector to force it out of the head.
5. Carefully cut the O-rings off the fluid-to-air connector assembly.
6. Carefully cut the O-rings off the head body. Do not nick, scratch or damage
the O-ring grooves.
The head is now ready to be rebuilt. See PEH-E (H108785) Assembly.
4.4.2 PEH-E Assembly

Use drawings H108785 and H122373.
4.4.2.1 Precautions
1. Be careful not to twist wires inside the head when screwing the lower head
onto the body. Turn the weakpoint at the same time.
2. Make sure that the 1.375 in space OD retaining ring (H106465) is used and
not retaining ring (H031706) used on the PEH-AB head. This fits, but has
a larger OD.
3. After connecting the head to the cable, do not use obsolete rubber boot
(H106459). Use the correct size split steel boot for the cable.
Private
4.4.2.2 Lower Head Assembly

Refer to drawing H122373 (same lower head as in MH-22 head).
1. Lubricate with DC-111 (B013740) and install two O-rings (B013113) onto
feedthrough (H701182).
2. Press the feedthrough assembly into the head (H030464) from pressure side,
using the nut driver section of connector wrench (H122201).
3. Install the insulator (H125979) and the connector rod sleeve (H036384) onto
the threaded end of the feedthrough assembly and tighten.
Note
Do not exceed 10 in-lbf torque.
4. Cut three, 14 in lengths of downhole hookup wire (H122757) and install the
BCC assembly.
a. On one wire, on one end only, install the BCC female assembly, Viton
female boot (H400313), boot liner (H245765) and socket contact
(H115576).
b. On the other two wires, on one end only, crimp female connector
(H030552).
These wires are the two ground wire connections.
Note
Use the correct female connector (H030552) for making the ground
connection. Use of the incorrect female connector or screwing the set
screws (B013811) directly to the downhole hook-up wire (H122757) may
lead to improper grounding connection and potential electrical failures.
5. Install the BCC connector onto the feedthrough connector.

a. Ensure the boots are fully bottomed out on the feedthrough.
the boot.
Private
c. Using a boot retainer/ extractor tool (H268423), push the boot retainer
(100593948) with the gas vent valve slot facing the feedthrough until
it stops.
Figure 4-6: Long boot retainer (100593948) on BCC make-up
6. Insert the female connector on the two ground wires into the lower head and
tighten the two set screws (B013811).
4.4.2.3 Head Assembly

Refer to drawing H108785
1. Install selected weakpoint into lower housing (H113588).

2. With lower head held in a vise, thread conductor wires through the holes
in weakpoint. Screw lower housing in place, tighten securely and lock
with spirol pin (B015067). While screwing in the lower housing, hold the
weakpoint and conductor wires firmly, not allowing the weakpoint or wires
to rotate to avoid twisting of the conductor wires.
3. Install spirol pin (B015067) below weakpoint to retain in housing.
4. Slide the upper housing (H113587) in place over the lower housing
(H113588).
5. Install the split ring (H113585) in position on the weakpoint shaft. Wire
together with copper wire (E008587) or string tie.
Note
Use blank-off boots (H400325) on any unused rope socket conductors.
6. Thread conductor wires through holes in split ring. Assemble female

connections on wires according to EH400327 and mark according to pin
number. Check insulation and continuity of the head, and pump full of
DC-111. The head is now ready for attachment to the cable cone rope socket.
7. Slip the spirolox ring (B013403) and retaining ring (H106465) over the rope
socket.
Private
8. Slide another retaining ring (H106465) over conductor wires onto the upper
housing (H113587) of the head.
9. Connect the conductor wire and the two ground wires of the torpedo
connection using the wiring diagram on assembly drawing H108785.

10. Put the split torpedo housing (H100642) in place making sure that the keys
in the torpedo engage the slots in the rope socket and the weakpoint. Put
the retainer ring and spirolox ring in place on the upper end of the torpedo,
then slide the retaining ring in place on the lower end and secure with snap
ring (B017514).
11. Install the fishing neck on the upper end of split torpedo.
Refer to drawing 100412438, Field Options in the appendices section. The
housing and torpedo should be filled with DC-111; use grease opening
provided.
Note
See drawing 100265539 for optional steel boots for different sizes of cable.
Note
Use split torpedo halves (H251542) for use with coil spring boot (H222214).
Note
Spring boots are now available for different cable sizes. See drawing
H222214 for the appropriate spring boot for your cable size.
4.5 PEH-EFA
Note
PEH-EF (P/N H713120) has been changed to PEH-EFA (P/N 101043054) for the
ease of field ordering by capitalization. Both are physically identical and the only
difference is that PEH-EF (P/N H713120) is classified as M&S and PEH-EFA
(P/N 101043054) as FTE (Fixed Asset).”
Private
Refer to the PEH-EFA Maintenance SWI - SLS-1 , InTouch # 6346028 for

assembly and disassembly instructions.
_X_PDF1_XX_
Figure 4-7: PEH-EFA Disassembly - 101043054 (following pages)
Private
4.6 PEH-KD
The assembly of the head contains several subassemblies, which are found
on drawings H407042, and H407071. Use removal tool H256138 to remove /
install the lower head assembly, H407042. The upper portion of the head is
very similar in construction to the standard PEH-E head. The lower head is
different, due to the requirement for seven feedthroughs, instead of the single
feedthrough in the PEH-E head. The lower head subassembly is detailed in the
subassembly drawings.
4.7 PEH-L
Refer to Free Point Indicator Tool (FPIT-D) Maintenance Manual (InTouch
#3016135)
4.8 PEK-BB
4.8.1 PEK-BB Disassembly

TECH
__________
ALE RT
Removal of the head (MH, PEH) from a PEK-BB without breaking the connection
below the PEK-BB can lead to injury. See Tech Alert #: 4580515 in the Tech
Alert Appendices.
___________________

1. Remove the spirol pin (B016634) located on the lower end of the bell housing
using a 1/4-in punch drive.
2. Unscrew the bell housing from the intermediate head and slide up cable.
3. Remove three set screws (H134123) from the upper section of intermediate
head, and unscrew the intermediate head from the MH-22 or PEH-E.
4. Remove the thread protector (H048186).
5. Unscrew the threaded ring (H036854), and remove two O-rings (B011285).
6. Drive out the molded connector (H122966) from the intermediate head using
drive punch (B015447).
Private
4.8.2 PEK-BB Assembly


1. Lightly lubricate the molded connector (H122966) with DC-111, and install
into intermediate head, (H122965) from the pressure side of head.
2. Install the three set screws (H134123) into the intermediate head. Do not
tighten.
4. Install two O-rings (B011285) into O-ring grooves on the lower section of
intermediate head and lubricate with DC-111.
5. Lubricate threads with 930AA Lubriplate grease (B013366) and install
threaded ring (H036854) onto the intermediate head.
6. Check insulation and continuity of head. The test results should read 500
Mohm or greater using a 500 V tester.
7. Install the thread protector (H048186) into the threaded ring.
8. If the head is not going to be installed onto the cable, install the thread
protector (H135585) into the upper section of intermediate head to protect
from elements while not being used.
9. Lubricate threads of bell housing (H122964) with Lubriplate grease 930AA
(B013366), and make up to intermediate head.
4.8.3 Makeup Procedure to MH-22/ PEH-E/ PEH-EF/ EFA
4.8.3.1 Makeup Procedure to MH-22/ PEH-E
1. Slide the bell housing (H122964) over the previously made up head.
2. Remove the thread protector from the previously made up MH-22 or PEH-E
head. Screw on the intermediate head (H122965) and tighten three set
screws (H134123).
3. Screw the bell housing onto the intermediate housing and install spirol pin
(B016634).
4. Fill the entire head assembly with DC-111 through Alemite fitting on bell
housing.
Private
4.8.3.2 Makeup Procedure to MH-22/ PEH-EF/ EFA

To use the PEK-BB with the PEH-EF/ EFA head the following equipment is
required (Figure 4-8):
Figure 4-8: Conversion of PEK-BB to PEH-EF/ EFA Head
4.9 PEK-BC
4.9.1 PEK-BC Disassembly

The PEK-BC Disassembly procedure is similar to the one for the PEK-BB. Refer
to Section4.8: PEK-BB and Appendix S.
4.9.2 PEK-BC Assembly

The PEK-BC Assembly procedure is similar to the one for the PEK-BB. Refer to
Section4.8: PEK-BB and Appendix S.
Private
4.10 PEK-BD
Refer to the PEK-BD Maintenance SWI - TRIM , InTouch # 6346023, for

Private
Private
4-27
4.11 PEK-BE
Refer to the PEK-BE Maintenance SWI - TRIM , InTouch # 6346026, for

Private
Private
4-29
4.12 PEK-E
4.12.1 PEK-E Disassembly

The PEK-E Disassembly procedure is similar to the one for the PEK-BB. Refer to
4.12.2 PEK-E Assembly

The PEK-E Assembly procedure is similar to the one for the PEK-BB. Refer to
4.13 PEK-F
Refer to the PEK-F Maintenance SWI - TRIM , InTouch # 6314703, for assembly
and disassembly instructions.
Private
Private
4-31
4.14 LEH-AA
4.14.1 Disassembly of LEH-AA, Lower Head Housing

1. Drive out the spirol pin (B013394).
2. Unscrew the fishing bell extension (100032875)
3. Using a punch, drive out the grooved pin (B032902).
Potential Severity: Light

Potential Loss: Assets
Hazard Category: Machinery equipment hand tools
This pin was designed to be inserted and removed in one direction. Insert
the punch on the opposite end of the grooves to drive the pin out.
4. Unscrew the lower housing (H701907).

5. Remove the fishing bell (100035758) by rotating the threaded ring
(100079339).
6. Disconnect the BCC Boots at the rope socket connection.
7. Remove the retaining ring (B013711) and disengage the rope socket and
cable from its housing.
8. Pull the wires coming from the fluid-to-air connectors through the slots on the
side of the weakpoint head assembly.
9. Remove the spirol pin (B015544) from the weakpoint head and disengage
the head from the weakpoint.
10. Unscrew the weakpoint from the lower head housing (100034976).
11. Using an Allen wrench, remove the two screws (B016564) from the RTD
retaining block (100175582). Slide the retaining block away from the RTD.
12. Remove the BCC boots using the retainer tool (H268423).
13. Remove the lower head/RTD sub-assembly using the cartridge pulling tool
from the lower head housing.
14. Use the torque wrench (B033177) to remove all of the fluid-to-air connectors.
Private
4.14.2 Disassembly of LEH-AA, Lower Head/ RTD

Sub-assembly
Refer to Figure 4-9 (p. 4-34).

1. Using the proper size punch, hammer the spirol pins (B018459) inward.
2. Separate the lower head frame (100524515) from the lower head pin adapter
(100037181).
3. Push the socket contacts (H222777) out of the lower head pin adapter using
the Winchester insertion /removal tool.
4. Remove the retaining ring (B024454) and the lower head connector
(H245261).
5. The remainder of this assembly should be intuitive.
4.14.3 LEH-AA Assembly, Lower Head/ RTD Sub-assembly

The LEH-AA can be wired for both hepta and mono cables. Refer to the wiring
diagram for the appropriate wiring.
1. Clean and inspect all parts for damage or wear. Clean all threads with
isopropyl alcohol or degreaser.
2. Check all new O-rings and backup rings (if any) for nicks, gouges, guts or
3. Install seven (7) socket insulators (H708975) into the holes of the lower head
pin adapter (100037181).
4. Check the resistance between the red and white wires on the RTD.
The resistance should measure between 100 and 120 ohms. If the resistance
is below 100 ohms do not install the RTD.
5. Insert the RTD (100088599) into the sleeve (100076079). Slide the standoff
(100076077) over the RTD wires and into the sleeve until it bottoms out on
the RTD flange. Put Loctite (B030472) on the threads of the sleeve. While
holding these three (3) components, thread the RTD wires through the hole
of in the lower head adapter.
6. Screw the RTD sleeve (100076079) all the way into the lower head adapter.
Private
Figure 4-9: Lower head sub-assembly
7. Cut seven (7) pieces of wire each four to five inches long. Crimp the seven
(7) socket connectors (H222777) on one end of the wires. Using the
installation tool, install the seven (7) socket connectors into the back end of
the insulators (H708975). Set this assembly aside for now and go to step 7.
8. Install the spring (H129818) and the locking button (100144988) into the
tongue of the lower head connector frame (100524515). Insert the O-ring
(M-011131) in the groove of (100524515).
9. Put an O-ring (B025479) in the groove of the pin contact insulator (H245261).
Using the other end of the wires discussed in step 5, crimp seven (7) pin
connectors (H222776) onto the wire. Install these pin connectors into the pin
contact insulator (H245261). Put some grease on the O-ring of (H245261).
Align the flat on the insulator with the flat inside of (100524515). Insert the
assembled Insulator into lower head connector frame.
10. Aligned the holes of (100524515) with the holes in (100037181) and secure
the two assemblies with spirol pins (B018459).
Private
Figure 4-10: Assembled lower head and RTD
4.14.4 LEH-AA Assembly, Lower Head Housing
Tip
Ensure the machined cavities that the fluid-to air connectors screw into are clean
and dry.
2. Using the O-ring installation tool (H701899), install O-ring (B012416) on each
of the seven fluid-to-air connectors (H701354).
3. Refer to engineering specification EH701944 for the installation of the fluid
to air connectors. Use a 1/4-in deep socket wrench with a 10 in-lb torque
wrench (B033177) to install the seven fluid-to-air connectors (H701354) into
the holes of the lower head housing (100034976).
4. Put the back-up ring (T5011464) in the hole of the lower head housing
followed by the O-ring (B011870).
5. Attach the RTD retaining block (100175582) to the lower head housing with
two cap screws (B016564).
6. Connect the cartridge pulling tool (100152023) to the lower head
sub-assembly. Align the RTD and the locking button with the alignment
groove on the lower head housing and insert the sub-assembly into the
housing. Make sure this assembly is seated properly.
7. Lubricate the split threaded ring (100079339) with Lubriplate grease
(B021698) and install it on the lower head housing using the Allen screws
supplied with the threaded ring.
8. Build the head leads using the following parts:
Private
• H400313 Viton female boots

• H245765 liner insulators
• H115576 socket contacts
• H122757 heavy insulated hook-up wire
9. Cut 10 inches of hook-up wire and assemble them as per the instructions
listed under EH400327 – BCC Connector assembly procedure. Ensure that
your crimping tool is adjusted properly before crimping sockets.
10. Install the BCC connector on the fluid-to-air connectors 1 through 8 using
the boot retainer tool (H268423).
the boot.
c. Using a boot retainer/extractor tool (H268423), push the boot retainer
(100593948) with the gas vent slot facing the feedthrough until it stops.
11. Screw the selected weakpoint into the lower head housing. Install the color
coded ring supplied with the weakpoint.
12. Use Rutherford red grease on this joint to avoid galling.
13. Screw the weakpoint adapter (H441437) on the weakpoint and tighten it with
a 9/16 in open-end wrench. Bottom the threaded joints without over torquing.
Use the wrench flat provided on the weakpoint adapter.
Potential Severity: Serious

Hazard Category: Machinery equipment hand tools
If over-torqued, damage to the weakpoint can occur.
14. Install O-ring (B013338) on the weakpoint adapter (H441737).

15. Connect the weakpoint head assembly (H245012/ 100926943) to the
weakpoint and secure with spirol pin (B015544).
16. Adjust the wire length by wrapping them neatly around the weakpoint.
Secure the wires to the weakpoint using lacing cord.
17. Divide the leads into two groups and place them through the slots on the
side of the weakpoint head.
18. Install male BCC plugs (H400320) into the female BCC in the rope socket
housing.
Private
Figure 4-11: Assembly of lower head housing
19. Tape the boots together to avoid getting them caught while installing the
fishing bell.
20. Align the keyway of the fishing bell (100035758) with the keys on the lower
head housing and the weakpoint head assembly. Install the fishing bell over
the weakpoint head. Put Lubriplate grease on the threads of the threaded ring
(100079339). Screw the threaded ring into the fishing bell until it bottoms out.
21. Screw the outer housing (H701907) onto the weakpoint head assembly
(H245012/ 100926943).
22. Put Lubriplate grease on the threads of the fishing bell. Screw the fishing
bell extension onto the fishing bell. Secure the connection with spirol pin
(B013394).
23. Insert grooved pin (B032902) through the hole in the outer housing.
24. Verify that the continuity is less than 1 ohm.
25. Verify that the head insulation resistance is 500 Megohms or better at 500
volts DC.
4.15 LEH-HT
4.15.1 LEH-HT Disassembly and Assembly

The disassembly and assembly of the LEH-HT tool is similar to the LEH-QT tool.
The only difference is that the hi-temp O-rings, weakpoints and loadcell are
substituted for the standard-usage components. These components are listed
in the kit (H395953) and also on the drawing (H356846), both included in this
manual.
Note
When the ECRD-G/H is used, the weakpoint head weldment must be PN
100926943, which includes:
• Weakpoint head PN 100927222
Private
• Weakpoint head key PN 100926946
In addition, the ECRD-G/H must be run with the extension rod PN 100921004.
The weakpoint head weldment PN 100926943 and the extension rod PN
100921004 are included in the LEH-QT ECRD-G/H Installation Kit PN

100927228.
For more information regarding the weakpoint head weldment, refer to the FCO
in Appendix Z. For more information regarding the ECRD kit, refer to ECRD-E/F
Operations and Maintenance Manual (InTouch # 4324935).
4.15.2 LEH-HT Operations - MaxWell Job Execution
4.15.2.1 Software Operation: Equipment Setup

This section describes the Equipment Setup task. The tool string configuration,
instructions for obtaining master calibration data and parameter initialization
are described in the following sections.
Equipment and Computation Manager
Verify the physical position of the Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression
Sensor tool in the toolstring. If Head Tension signals are to be acquired, make
sure the tool is immediately on top of the telemetry cartridge and that the sensor
is physically connected directly to the telemetry cartridge’s electronics.
HTEN Parameter Settings
There are three parameters associated with the Heads and Subs with
Tension/Compression Sensor. Parameter HTEN_CALI determines which set of
gain and offset to be applied to data flow. By default HTEN_CALI is “Calibration”
which dictates the use of HTEN_GAIN and HTEN_OFFSET computed from
accumulations. If HTEN_CALI is set to “Manual”, then two other parameters
HTEN_MULTIPL and HTEN_SHIFT are used in the data flow. Parameter
HTEN_MULTIPL is effectively the manual entry Gain and HTEN_SHIFT the
manual entry Offset.
Table 4-8: Parameters for Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor
Lower Upper
Parameter Description Unit Default
Limit Limit
HTEN_CALI Head Tension Calibration type Calibration_Manual Calibration - -
Head Tension multiplier or
HTEN_MULTIPL Unitless 1.0 0.8 1.2
manual entry gain
Private
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Head Tension shift or manual
HTEN_SHIFT lbf 0.0 -1000 1000
entry offset
Weak Point Configuration
Weak Point configuration is performed by selecting the Weak Point from the drop
down list for Weak Point type property. Weak point can be either mechanical or
electrically controlled.
4.15.2.2 Software Operation: HTEN Calibration

This section describes the calibration tasks, procedures, measurements, etc.,
before tool operation. There are two Calibrations associated with Heads and
Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor’s Head Tension, Master and Before
Logging Surface.
The calibration parameters and coefficients for Heads and Subs with
Tension/Compression Sensor are as follows:
Table 4-9: Calibration Parameters and Coefficients for Heads and Subs with
Tension/Compression Sensor
Default /
Lower Upper
OSDD Code Description Unit Reference
Limit Limit
Value
HTEN_MCAL_GAIN Head Tension Master Gain Unitless 1.0 0.8 1.2
HTEN_MCAL_OFFSET Head Tension Master Offset Lbf 0.0 -1000 1000
HTEN_ZM_REF Head Tension Zero Reference Lbf 0.0 -2000 2000
Tool String
HTEN_PM_REF Head Tension Plus Reference Lbf -100 10000
Weight
RHTE_ZM_BF Head Tension Zero Measurement Lbf 0.0 -300 300
Tool String
RHTE_PM_BF Head Tension Plus Measurement Lbf -15% +15%
Weight
HTEN_GAIN Head Tension Gain Unitless 1.0 0.8 1.2
HTEN_OFFSET Head Tension Offset lbf 0.0 -1000 1000
Master Calibration
The Master Calibration has no task associated. It allows user to enter the Master
Calibration Coefficients obtained from the Shop Calibration procedure as per
Head’s Maintenance Manual. This is done through the interface from Vertical
Viewer’s Calibration tab.
Private
1. Select HTEN Master Calibration in the Calibrations drop down.

2. Switch the Report Type to Average Detail to see the HTEN_MCAL_GAIN and
HTEN_MCAL_OFFSET calibration coefficients.
3. Click on the Edit Coefficients icon from the top left icon toolbar. This enables
the editing of the calibration coefficients.
4. Enter the gain and offset from the Shop calibration procedure.
5. Click on the Save Coefficients icon from the top left icon toolbar to save
the values just entered.
Before Logging Surface Calibration
The zero reading of the tension is notably inaccurate, varying with the
hardware setup. An adjustment prior to running in the hole can be computed
from accumulations. The computed HTEN_GAIN and HTEN_OFFSET can
be overridden by manually enter and apply the gain and offset through the
parameters HTEN_MULTIPL and HTEN_SHIFT.
The Before Logging Surface task tree for the Heads and Subs with
Tension/Compression Sensor consists of two accumulation subtasks, Zero
and Plus accumulations. When both Zero and Plus accumulations are
available, computation of the HTEN_GAIN and HTEN_OFFSET will take place
automatically. The Calibration tab in Vertical Viewers shall update with the result
of the HTEN_GAIN and HTEN_OFFSET.
Zero Accumulation
When performing the Zero Accumulation, make sure to remove any weight
on the Head or Sub with tension sensor. This can be done either by laying
the tool horizontally or vertically by using the C-Plate. The Calibration tab in
Vertical Viewers shall update with the result of the Zero Measurement calibration
coefficient RHTE_ZM_BF (You might need to switch the Report Type to Average
Detail to see this).
Plus Accumulation
The Plus Reference is automatically computed from the tool string weight. This
should be verified by reading the tension from the CMTD with the entire tool
string hanging off the head/sub with tension sensor. The Plus Accumulation
should be run with this setup. The Plus Accumulation generates the Plus
Measurement RHTE_PM_BF.
Private
4.15.2.3 Software Operation: Log/Data Acquisition

This section describes the acquisition channels and parameters used by the
Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor.
Measure Points
Table 4-10: Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's measure points
Name Description Type Position

Head Tension Head Tension Sensor Tool String Zero
Data Gauges
Table 4-11: Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's Data Gauge Display
OSDD Code Domain Type Shown

HTEN DOMAIN_ACQ Digital In Acq Console’s Top Data Gauge Bar
RHTE DOMAIN_ACQ Digital Not shown by default
Log Display
Table 4-12: Table 3 8: Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's Log Display
OSDD Code Domain Shown

HTEN DOMAIN_ACQ In Horizontal Viewer’s Index track
HTEN DOMAIN_DEPTH In Vertical Viewer’s Index track
RHTE DOMAIN_ACQ Not shown by default
RHTE DOMAIN_DEPTH Not shown by default
Channels
Table 4-13: Table 3 10: Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's Channels
OSDD Measure
Description Measurement DOMAIN_DEPTH DOMAIN_ACQ Availability
Code Point
Raw Head Head
RHTE Force 6-in Yes Customer
Tension Tension
Head Head
HTEN Force 6-in Yes Basic
Tension Tension
Private
4.15.2.4 Software Operation: Processing

HTEN Computation
The HTEN data channel is generated through the following computation:
HTEN = (((MCG * RHTE) + MCO) * Gain) + Offset

Units: lbf
Where,
RHTE: Raw Head Tension
MCG: HTEN_MCAL_GAIN (Master Calibration Gain)
MCO: HTEN_MCAL_OFFSET (Master Calibration Offset)
Gain: HTEN_GAIN or HTEN_MULTIPL, depending on whether
HTEN_CALI is Calibration or Manual.
Offset: HTEN_OFFSET or HTEN_SHIFT, depending on whether
MTEM Computation
The MTEM data channel is generated through the following computation:
MTEM = a + b * RMTE + c * RMTE2 + d * RMTE3

Units: degC
Where,
RMTE = Raw Mud Temperature
a = -243.4010
b = -1.178711e-02
c = 4.44480e-08
d = -3.04900e-13
4.15.2.5 MaxWell – OP Differences

This section lists the significant differences between the APS MaxWell and OP
implementations.
• OP does not support calibration task. Gain and offset are manually entered.
• MaxWell supports Head Tension Master and Before Logging Surface
calibrations.
• Normalized EU Gain and EU Offset are not available in OP and a different
value is used depending on the acquisition cartridge used.
Private
• In OP, downhole force channels are DF and CDF associated with DTC
cartridge. In MaxWell, these channels are RHTE and HTEN associated with
4.16 LEH-MT
4.16.1 LEH-MT Disassembly and Assembly

The disassembly and the assembly of the LEH-MT tool is similar to the LEH-QT
tool. The only difference is that the Load Cell Assembly diameter is the same as
the LEH-ST to accommodate the temperature transducer. These components
can be identified by referring to the drawing H360190 (included in this manual).
The uphole components on the LEH-MT are identical to the uphole components
on the LEH-QT.
Note
When ECRD-G/H is used, the weakpoint head weldment must be PN
• Weakpoint head PN 100927222
• Weakpoint head key PN 100926946
In addition, the ECRD-G/H must be run with the split extended piston rod
(101304434), the split extended piston rod adaptor (101306160) and the
fishing bell (101090184). The weakpoint head weldment (100926943), the
split extended piston rod (101304434), the split extended piston rod adaptor
(101306160) and the fishing bell (101090184) are included in the LEH-MT
ECRD-G/ H Installation Kit (101308325). For more information regarding
the weakpoint head weldment, refer to the FCO in Appendix Z. For more
information regarding the ECRD kit, refer to ECRD-E/F Operations and
4.16.2 LEH-MT Operations- Maxwell Job Execution

Private

Lower Upper
Parameter Description Unit Default Limit Limit
HTEN_CALI Head Tension Calibration Calibration Calibration - -
type Manual
HTEN_MULTIPLHead Tension multiplier Unitless 1.0 0.8 1.2
or manual entry gain
HTEN_SHIFT Head Tension shift or lbf 0.0 -1000 1000
manual entry offset
Software Operation: HTEN Calibration

Logging Surface.
Private
Default /
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Value
HTEN_PM_REF Head Tension Plus Reference Lbf Tool -100 10000
String
Weight
RHTE_PM_BF Head Tension Plus Measurement Lbf Tool -15% +15%
String
Weight
Master Calibration

Private

Zero Accumulation
Plus Accumulation
Software Operation: Log/Data Acquisition
Measure Points

Private

Mud Temperature Mud Temperature Sensor 14.55 inch
Data Gauges

HTEN DOMAIN_ACQ Digital In Acq Console’s Top
Data Gauge Bar
MTEM DOMAIN_ACQ Digital Not shown by default
Log Display
Table 4-18: Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's Log Display

HTEN DOMAIN_ACQ In Horizontal Viewer’s Index
track
MTEM DOMAIN_ACQ Not shown by default
MTEM DOMAIN_DEPTH Not shown by default
Channels
Table 4-19: Heads and Subs with Tension/Compression Sensor's Channels
OSDD Measure
Description MeasurementDOMAIN_DEPTH
DOMAIN_ACQ
Availability
Code Point
RHTE Raw Head Head Force 6 inch Yes Customer
Tension Tension
HTEN Head Head Force 6 inch Yes Basic
Tension Tension
MTEM Mud Mud Temperature 6 inch Yes Basic
Temperature Temperature
Private
Software Operation: Processing

HTEN Computation

Units: lbf
Where,
MTEM Computation

Units: degC
Where,
a = -243.4010
b = -1.178711e-02
c = 4.44480e-08
d = -3.04900e-13
MaxWell – OP Differences
implementations.
calibrations.
Private

4.17 LEH-PT
4.17.1 LEH-PT Disassembly

Refer to drawing T5013565 to disassemble the LEH-PT.
Note
When ECRD-G/H is used, the weakpoint head weldment must be part number
• Weakpoint head (100927222)
• Weakpoint head key (100926946)
In addition, the ECRD-G/H must be run with the extension rod (101060957)
and the fishing bell (101627902) . The weakpoint head weldment (100926943),
the extension rod (101060957) and the fishing bell (101627902) are included
in the LEH-PT ECRD-G/H Installation Kit PN 101122795.For more information
regarding the weakpoint head weldment, refer to the FCO in Appendix Z.For
more information regarding the ECRD kit, refer to ECRD-E/F Operations and
4.17.1.1 Remove the Cable to Head Assembly
1. Remove the snap ring (H329445) from the cone steel boot (H121961) using
needle nose pliers.
2. Drive out the spirol pin (B013813) from the boot using a 3/16 in punch.
3. Remove the two 1/4-20 screws (B018129) from the split steel boot.
4. Remove the two halves of the rope socket housing (H701897).
5. Remove the spirol pin (B013394) from the extension fishing bell (H701908).
6. Unscrew the bell and slide it up the cable.
Private
Note
Remember that grooved pins have a slight taper, so one end is smaller than
the other. Reverse out the pin by applying the punch to the small end side of
the pin.
7. Reverse out groove pin (B032902) from the outer housing (H701907) using a
1/8 in punch. Do not drive through the groove pin.
8. Unscrew the outer housing and slide it up the cable.
9. Disconnect the BCC connections at the torpedo with the connector disengage
tool (H245789).
10. Remove the retaining ring (B013711) from the rope socket housing
(H701897) using internal snap rings pliers.
11. Slide the cable forward to disengage the rope socket.
12. Remove the cable through the slot in the rope socket housing (H701897).
4.17.1.2 Remove the Thermometers
1. Loosen screw (B013519).

2. Rotate the collar retaining (H351347) clockwise to open the thermometer
slots.
3. Remove all three thermometer assemblies (H356843).
4.17.1.3 Remove the Fishing Bell (H351343)
1. Unscrew and remove the split ring (H350383).
Note
If you encounter resistance when removing the fishing bell, remove spirol
pins (B013394) from the fishing bell. Sometimes the fishing bell will hang or
snag on the alignment key.
Private
2. Unscrew and remove the fishing bell (H351343).

4.17.1.4 Remove the Head Lead Wires
1. Remove the tape holding the head lead wires on the weakpoint and loadcell
assemblies.
2. Remove the boot retainer (100593948) and female boot from the feed-thru
connector in the lower 31-pin head (T5013557).
a. If the boot retainer or boots are stuck to the feed-thru connector, use a
boot removal tool (H268423) to remove it.
b. Inspect the head lead wires for damage.
4.17.1.5 Remove the Weakpoint Assembly (H245012/ 100926943)

The purpose of this procedure is to replace the weakpoint.
1. Remove the weakpoint head assembly (H245012/ 100926943), the

weakpoint adapter (H441737), and weakpoint (H712954) from the loadcell
rod using a 9/16 in open end wrench on the weakpoint adapter wrench flats.
2. Disassemble the weakpoint assembly.
a. Remove the spirol pin (B015544) from the weakpoint head assembly
(H245012/ 100926943) using a 1/16 in punch.
b. Slide the weakpoint adapter (H441737) from the weakpoint head
assembly (H245012/ 100926943).
c. Remove the weakpoint adapter (H441737) from the weakpoint
(H712954).
3. Remove the weakpoint adapter O-ring (B013338).
Private
4.17.1.6 Remove the Split Threaded Ring (H350383)

1. Remove both screws (B013680) from the split threaded ring (H350383).
2. Remove the split threaded ring (H350383).
4.17.1.7 Remove Bulkhead to Head Adapter Assembly (T5013553)
1. Remove thread protector (T1037599).

2. Remove the bulkhead assembly using the SFT-328 UDFH SlimHot Cartridge
puller (T1037405).
3. To replace the RTD go to the “Disassemble the bulkhead assembly" section.
4.17.1.8 Remove the Loadcell Assembly (T5013560)

The purpose of this procedure is to remove the loadcell assembly for service
and maintenance.
1. Remove the retaining nut (T5013559) using the loadcell installation/removal

tool (T5013564).
2. Extract the loadcell (T5013560), from the lower 31-pin head (T5013557).
3. To disassembly the loadcell assembly (T5013560) go to the "Disassemble
the loadcell assembly" section.
4.17.1.9 Remove the Ten Feed-thru's (T5011962)
1. Remove all ten feed-thru connectors (T5011962) using a 1/4 in deep socket.
a. If necessary, punch out the feed-thru from the downhole end using a
black contact removal/installation tool.
Private
2. Replace all feed-thru O-rings (B041023).

4.17.1.10 Disassemble the Bulkhead Assembly

The purpose of this procedure is to replace the RTD in case of failure, clean and
replace all damaged parts and replace all O-rings.
Refer to drawing T5013553 to disassembly the bulkhead to head adapter.
Figure 4-12: Bulkhead disassembly
1. Remove the O-ring (B042374) from the lower head 31-pin (T1037553).
2. Separate the lower 31-pin head (T1037553) from the insulator adapter
(T5013554).
a. Remove the six spirol pins (B013677).
Private
3. Remove the RTD.

a. Push out the pins (H222776) numbers 12, 13, 30 and 31 from the
insulator (T5013563) using the removal tool (B028206).
b. Remove the two RTD retainer screws (B016956).

c. Remove the RTD retainer (T5013556).
d. Remove the RTD while feeding the leads back through the insulator
adapter (T5013554).
e. Remove the RTD spacer (H360194).
4. Remove the O-ring (B029541) from the 31-pin insulator (T5013563).
4.17.1.11 Disassemble the Loadcell (T5013560)

The purpose of this procedure is to service and maintain the loadcell assembly,
clean and replace all damaged parts, and replace all O-rings and back-up rings.
Refer to drawing T5013560 to disassembly the loadcell.
1. Remove the filler plug (H352074).

2. Drain the oil in the loadcell assembly to an acceptable disposable container.
Figure 4-13: Disassembly of loadcell assembly
3. Remove the piston rod (T5013561) from the loadcell assembly.
Private
4. Remove the loadcell piston (H352065) from the piston rod. Replace all
O-rings, back-up rings, and slydrings located on the piston.
5. Remove the loadcell housing (H360168) from the loadcell assembly.
6. Remove the retaining ring (H701312) from the lower adapter of the loadcell
assembly using the modified socket (H701459).
7. Remove the 5-pin feed-thru (H701893) using a #4-40 screw.
a. Replace all O-rings and back-up rings on the 5-pin feed-thru.
Figure 4-14: Disassembly of piston (H352065)
8. After all O-rings and back-up rings have been replaced and all parts have
been cleaned, reassemble the loadcell.
Refer to the “Preparing the loadcell” section.
Private
4.17.2 LEH-PT Assembly

Note
In addition, the ECRD-G/H must be run with the extension rod (101060957)
and the fishing bell (101627902). The weakpoint head weldment (100926943),
the extension rod (101060957) and the fishing bell (101627902) are included
in the LEH-PT ECRD-G/H Installation Kit PN 101122795. For more information
regarding the weakpoint head weldment, refer to the FCO in Appendix Z. For
more information regarding the ECRD kit, refer to ECRD-E/F Operations and
4.17.2.1 Tools Required

• extraction tool - for size 20 (E035987)
• wire strippers for 20 and 24 AWG wire
• calibrated crimping tool (B017964)
• wire cutters
• hammer
• pliers, long needle nose, 7 in (B023918)
• needle nose pliers
• pin / socket installation removal tool
• socket wrench (B031666)
• SFT-328 UDFH SlimHot cartridge puller (T1037405)
• extractor (H268423)
• torque wrench, 0-10 in/lbs (B033177)
• crowsfoot wrench (B043269)
• loadcell installation/removal tool (T5013564)
Additional materials:
• Mystik grease (used on threads) - B039178
Private
• solder - E039674
• solder - 100714562
• teflon lacing cord - E016830
• Loctite - B030472
• tape - T106898
• tubing, shrinkable 3/8 in diameter - E043713
• tubing, shrinkable 20 AWG - E017992
• Krytox grease (used on all O-rings) - B039179
• di-electric fluid - B022152
Note
When the ECRD-G/ H is installed in the LEH-PT, ensure the following parts
are used.
• Weakpoint head weldment (100926943)
• Extension rod (101060957)
• Fishing bell (101627902)
4.17.2.2 Bulkhead to Head Adapter (T5013553)

Refer to the bill of material and drawing T5013553.
1. Inspect all parts for defects and perform a pre-assembly of machined parts
to ensure proper fit.
Private
Figure 4-15: Bulkhead to head adapter, T5013553
3. Build the wire harness according to the wire diagram on drawing T5013553.
Private
Figure 4-16: Bulkhead to head adapter wiring (100507408)
a. Cut wires for the harness.

• E056144 - 11 pieces of 20 AWG green wire at 4 in
• E056138 - 2 pieces of 24 AWG yellow wire at 4 in
• E026144 - 1 piece of 20 AWG wire at 3 in (for a jumper).
b. Strip 1/4 in insulation from each end of the wire identified in step 3a above.
c. Cover the surge arrester (E050573) with shrink tubing (E043713).
d. Add shrink tubing (E025177) to cover exposed shield wires on E056138.
e. Install sockets (H222777) to one end of the 15 wires using the calibrated
crimping tool and crimping procedure T1000751.
f. Install sockets (H222776) to the other end of the 15 wires using a
calibrated crimping tool and crimping procedure T1000751.
Note
To add flexibility to the surge arrester (for installation purposes), the solid wire
may be cut back on one end of the surge arrester and a flexible stranded wire
soldered onto the solid strand to make up the length removed.
g. Install jumper #15 to the surge arrester (E050573).

i. Add shrink tubing.
h. Terminate cable shields using solder (B030757) per SH145360.
Private
Note
Do NOT terminate the RTD wires at this time.
4. Insert the sockets (H222777) on the wire harness into insulator (T5013555).
5. Install the insulator (T5013555) into the insulator adapter (T5013554).
Figure 4-17: Inserting insulator (T5013555) into insulator adapter (T5013554)
a. Apply Loctite (B030472) to the three set screws before installing into
the insulator adapter (T5013554).
b. Secure the insulator using the three set screws (B017319).
6. Install the ground lug (H135994) into the insulator adapter (T5013554).
Private
Figure 4-18: Bulkhead adapter assembly
7. Install the RTD (H360028).

a. Install the RTD spacer (H360194) onto the RTD (H360028).
b. Cut the RTD wire leads to approximately 5 in.
c. Fish the RTD wire leads through the wire passage in the insulator adapter
(T5013554).
d. Slide the RTD retainer (T5013556) over the RTD (H360028).
e. Apply Loctite (B030472) to the set screws (B045400).
f. Install the RTD retainer (T5013556) onto the insulator adapter (T5013554)
using set screws (B045400).
g. Terminate the RTD wires in accordance with the wire diagram on
drawing T5013553. See Figure 4-16: Bulkhead to head adapter wiring
(100507408).
8. Install the O-ring (B029541) onto the 31 pin insulator (T5013563).
Private
9. Insert the pins (H222776) from wire harness and RTD into the 31 pin insulator
(T5013563).
10. Solder the surge arrestor (E050573) to the ground lug (H135994).
11. Insert the 31 pin insulator (T5013563) into the lower head (T1037553).
12. Insert the insulator adapter (T5013554) into the lower head (T1037553).
a. Insert the six spirol pins (B013677) to secure the insulator adapter and
lower head together.
Figure 4-19: Bulkhead assembly (T5013553)
13. Install the conductive O-ring (B042374) onto the lower head (T1037553).
14. Install the plug (T1037554) and spring (H129818) into the lower head
(T1037553).
15. Refer to drawing T5013553 to perform electrical checks on the fully
assembled bulkhead to head adapter.
4.17.2.3 Prepare the Loadcell Assembly (T5013560)

1. Inspect all parts for defects and perform a pre-assembly of machined parts to
ensure proper fit. See Figure 4-20: Strain element (H356842).
Private
3. Run an abrasive cord through the holes in the lower adapter (T5013558) to
remove burrs that may damage the strain element electrical leads. Note
that this is done prior to assembly.
Figure 4-20: Strain element (H356842)
4. Install hex (jam) nuts (H712027) to both ends of the strain element
(H356842). Note that the nuts have an arrow, that when installed will point
away from the strain element and toward the ends of the assembly.
a. Apply Loctite (B030472) to the hex nut threads.
b. Orient the nut so that the arrow is pointing to the end of the strain element.
c. Thread the hex nut up to the strain element - finger tight.
5. Apply Loctite (B030472) to the threads of the coupler (H352066).
6. Attach the coupler (H352066) to the strain element as shown in Figure 4-20:
Strain element (H356842) above.
7. Apply Loctite (B030472) to the threads of the lower adapter (T5013558).
8. Attach the lower adapter (T5013558) to the strain element (H356842).
9. The hex (jam) nuts (H712027) must be tightened in the direction toward the
lower adapter and hex coupler, not toward the strain element.
a. Torque the jam nuts to approximately 37.5 ft-lbf while pulling 9,000 lb.
tension on the assembly using a calibrated pulling device.
Private
Figure 4-21: Loadcell length after TDC stand operations
b. Verify the overall length of the strain element to be 6.76 ±0.05 in. See
Figure 4-21: Loadcell length after TDC stand operations or section A-A
on drawing T5013560.
Quality Note
Apply extreme care when fishing the leads through the holes in the lower
adapter. Request help from an experienced technician, as needed, to ensure
this process goes smoothly.
10. After the strain element has been torqued, feed the leads thought the
lower adapter. Note that you may have to bevel the white shield to help it
get through the holes.
11. Prepare the strain element cable leads.
Figure 4-22: Strain element cable preparation
Private
a. Cut the wires so that they extend beyond the lower adapter by
approximately 4 in.
b. Install a 0.25 in piece of head shrink tubing (E025177) onto each of the
twisted pair cable leads as shown in the figure above.

12. Cut a 12 in piece of cable (E039073) for use as a ground. Note that this wire
is shown in the wiring diagram below and on drawing T5013560.
Figure 4-23: Strain element wiring diagram
a. Install the ground as shown in the wiring diagram on T5013560.

b. Feed the ground through the lower adapter (T5013558). Note that the
ground wire should extend beyond the lower adapter by approximately
4 in.
13. Assemble the five removable contact sockets (E037617) using the crimping
tool (B017964) in accordance with installation instruction T1000751.
a. Set the crimping tool inside diameter to 0.42 ±0.002 in (#58 size drill bit).
b. Assemble the sockets (E037617) to the strain element leads and the
ground wire.
Private
Figure 4-24: Loadcell cable assembly
c. Insert the removable contact sockets into the insulator socket (H360048).
14. Insert the insulator socket (H360048) into the lower adapter (T5013558).
a. Line up the insulator socket with the slot in the lower adapter (T5013558).
b. Pull the strain element leads back through the holes they were previously
pushed into.
c. Gently push the insulator socket in while pulling the strain element wires
from the other side. DO NOT damage the pin connections by pulling to
hard on the strain element leads.
d. Install the grooved pin (B024533).
Quality Note
Take care not to put strain on the solder joints.
e. Secure excess wire at the end of the strain element on the wrench flat
using cord (E016830).
15. Check insulation of each shield to mass ground with a 500 VDC megger.
a. Verify the shield is not grounded.
16. Check the leads with an ohmmeter after the soldered connections are made.
a. Values should be:
• Pins 11 and 12 = 1000 ohms ± 100 ohms
• Pins 14 and 15 = 1000 ohms ± 150 ohms
• Pin 11 and mass ground = > 100 megohms at 30 VDC max
• Pin 13 and mass ground = > 100 megohms at 30 VDC max.
17. Prepare the 5-pin feed-thru (H701893).
Private
Figure 4-25: 5-pin feed-thru
a. Verify continuity of each feed-thru pin and check each pin to mass for
shorts.
b. Install both sets of O-rings (B041387) and back-up rings (H360188).
c. Apply Krytox grease (B039179) to O-rings and back-up rings.
18. Install the 5-pin feed-thru (H701893) into the lower adapter (T5013558) bore.
Figure 4-26: Installing the 5 pin feed-thru and retaining ring
a. Align the pins with the insulation socket (H360048).

b. Use a #4-40 screw to insert the 5-pin feed-thru (H701893).
c. Verify the 5-pin feed-thru has seated.
19. Install the small retaining ring (H701312) using modified socket (H701459).
a. Torque the retaining ring to 30 ft-lbf using the modified socket (H701459).
20. Prepare the loadcell piston (H652065) and the loadcell piston rod
(T5013561).
Private
Figure 4-27: Piston (H352065)
a. Install the slydring (B035191) on the inside of the loadcell piston

(H352065).
b. Install the O-ring (B041270) and back-up ring (B035195) on the inside
of the loadcell piston (H352065).
c. Install the O-ring (B041752) and back-up ring (B035374) to the outside of
loadcell piston (H352065).
d. Lubricate the O-rings, back-up rings, and slydring with Krytox grease
(B039179).
e. Install the slydring (B035365) on the piston when the piston rod assembly
is ready to install into the housing.
i. Apply Krytox grease (B039179) to the slydring (B035365).
Private
Figure 4-28: Loadcell assembly
f. Install the compression spring (H360189) on the loadcell piston rod

(T5013561).
g. Install the piston to spring spacer (T5013562) on the loadcell piston rod
(T5013561).
h. Install the loadcell piston (H352065) onto the loadcell piston rod
(T5013561).
21. Install the lower adapter O-ring (B041751).
a. Apply Krytox grease to O-ring (B041751).
22. Install the loadcell housing (H360168).
23. Attach the assembled loadcell piston rod to the coupler (H352066).
24. Vacuum oil fill using Di-Electric Fluid, DOW 200, 500 CST Viscosity at 25
degC (B022152).
Private
Figure 4-29: Filling the loadcell with oil
a. Install the adapter (H352074) with O-ring (B020705) into the lower
adapter oil fill hole.
b. Apply DC111 (B021698) to the area around the end of the oil fill adapter
and lower adapter oil fill hole.
c. Connect the vacuum pump to the adapter (H352074).
d. Open the valve on the hand pump.
e. Start the vacuum pump and pull a vacuum on the loadcell.
f. When air bubbles quit migrating into the DC200 reservoir, indicating a
good vacuum has been obtained, stop the vacuum pump.
g. Open the DC200 reservoir to atmospheric pressure. This will allow the
lower adapter and hand pump to back fill with DC200.
h. When the pressure gauge on the manifold indicates 1 psi, the lower
adapter has completed the first vacuum / fill cycle.
i. Restart the vacuum pump.
j. Close the DC200 reservoir to atmospheric pressure.
Private
k. Perform a second vacuum / back filling cycle repeating steps “e” through
“h”.
l. When the lower adapter is completely back filled with DC200 a second
time, CLOSE the valve on the hand pump and on the DC200 reservoir.
m. Elevate the upper end of the lower adapter as much as possible.
n. Monitor the vacuum line for removal of air bubbles.
o. Once all the air has been removed, pressure the tool until the loadcell
spacer (T5013562) extends beyond the loadcell housing (H360168)
approximately 1/2 in. See Figure 4-29: Filling the loadcell with oil above.
p. Apply Lubriplate to the filler plug (H352073).
Note
The task now is to remove the filler line and insert the filler plug (H352073)
before the compression spring pushes the loadcell spacer back into the
loadcell housing.
q. Hold the compression spring (H360189) so that it does not push the
spacer back into the housing.
r. Remove the oil fill adapter (H352074).
s. Place the filler plug (H352073) with O-ring (B041750) into the filler hole.
t. Gently let the spring return the loadcell spacer back into the housing.
u. When the loadcell spacer is flush with the loadcell housing, screw in
the filler plug.
v. Check for air by pushing down on the loadcell piston rod (T5013561).
• If the rod does not move, then the air has been removed from the
system.
• If the rod moves, then perform the oil fill procedure again.
25. Apply Krytox grease to the area where the loadcell spacer (T5013562) and
loadcell housing (H360168) line up.
26. Recheck the testing results in accordance with T5013691.
27. Etch the following information onto the lower adapter (T5013558).
• Serial number
• “Gain” value from the test data sheet.
Private
Figure 4-30: Lower adapter (T5013558) O-rings
28. Install both O-rings (B041753) on the lower adapter (T5013558).

29. Install both back-up rings (H396054) on the lower adapter (T5013558).
See Figure 4-30.
30. Apply Krytox grease to the O-rings (B041753) and back-up rings (H396054).
4.17.2.4 Prepare the Fishing Bell (H351343)

Figure 4-31: Fishing bell (H351343)
Private
3. Install the three spirol pins (B013394).
4. Install the O-ring (B023670) under the split ring.

5. Apply Lubriplate to the inside of the split ring (H350383) and O-ring
(B023670).
6. Install the split ring (H350383) using two screws (B013680).
7. Apply lubriplate to the inside of the retaining collar (H351347).
8. Install the retaining collar (H351347).
9. Install the screw (B013519).
4.17.2.5 Prepare the Weakpoint Assembly

Figure 4-32: Weakpoint assembly
3. Install the O-ring (B013338) onto the weakpoint adapter (H441737).
4. Apply Lubriplate to the threads of the weakpoint adapter (H441737).
5. Attach the weakpoint adapter (H441737) to the weakpoint.
6. Apply Krytox (B039179) to the O-ring (B013338).
7. Back out the spirol pin (B0145544) so that the weakpoint adapter can be
inserted into the weakpoint head assembly (100926943).
Private
8. Install the weakpoint adapter (H441737) with the weakpoint into the
weakpoint head assembly (100926943).
9. Re install the spirol pin (B015544).
4.17.2.6 Prepare the Head Leads

Refer to the bill of material and drawing 100507408.
Figure 4-33: Wiring diagram, 100507408
1. Cut ten pieces of cable (H122757) to 21-1/2 in.

2. Attach the Kalrez female boot.
Private
a. Apply Lubriplate the the wire before installing the female boot.
b. Number each Kalrez boot head lead. The numbering nomenclature is
one through ten indicated on the boot by a series of bumps in a specific
pattern.
c. Slide a Kalrez female boot (H245758) onto each end of the 10 head leads
(total=20 boots). See Figure 4-33.
3. Slide a boot liner (H245764) onto each end of the 10 head leads. (total of
20 liners). See Figure 4-33.
4. Install the sockets (H115576) on each end of the 10 head leads (total of 20
sockets). See Figure 4-33.
5. Slide the boot liner into place over the socket.
6. Slide the Kalrez female boot into place over the boot liner.
4.17.2.7 Prepare the Lower 31-pin Head (T5013557)

1. Remove any burrs that may cause shorting of a feed-thru.
Figure 4-34: Installing the feed-thru (T5011962)
2. Remove any dust or debris using an air compressor.

4. Install the feed-thru O-rings, B041023 onto ten feed-thru's (T5011962).
Private
5. Apply Krytox to the O-ring on the feed-thru (T5011962) - total=10.

6. Install nine of the ten feed-thru's using a 10 in-lb torque wrench, B033177.
Refer to EH701944, Installation of Fluid-to-Air Connectors procedure. The
empty hole permits the release of air when the bulkhead is installed.
7. Install the head leads onto the feed-thru's, T5011962.
a. Install one end of each head lead over each feed-thru connector.
b. Install the boot retainers (100593948) over each booted feed-thru
connection so that the gas vent slot of the long boot retainer lines up
with the feed-thrus shoulder.
4.17.2.8 Assembling the Bulkhead Assembly (T5013553)

This section assumes that all the instructions in “Preparing the loadcell assembly
(T5013560) section are complete.
2. Install the back-up ring (101522856) and O-ring (B041754) onto the RTD as
shown in Figure 4-36 and Figure 4-37. Note the order of installation and slide
on both parts until they contact the RTD retainer (T5013556).
Figure 4-36: Assembly of RTD seals - O-ring (B041754) and back-up ring (101522856)
Private
Figure 4-37: Bulkhead assembly with RTD seals installed - external view
3. Apply Krytox grease to the O-ring (B041754).

4. Verify Krytox grease has been applied to O-ring (B042374).
5. Insert the bulkhead assembly into the downhole end of the lower 31-pin head
(T5013557) in position so that the RTD lines up with the hole provided in
the lower head.
6. Install this assembly using the UDFH SlimHot Cartridge Puller - SFT-328
(T1037405) until the spring-loaded pulg snaps into place in the internal bore
slot.
Figure 4-38: Assembly fitted into the downhole end of the tool
7. Install the remaining feed-throughs into the lower head (T5013557).

a. Install the head lead onto the feed-through (T5011962).
b. Install the boot retainer (100593948) so that the gas vent slot of the long
boot retainer lines up with the feed-thrus shoulder.
Private
4.17.2.9 Installing the Loadcell Assembly (T5013560)

2. Verify installation of the O-rings (B041753) and back up rings (H396054).
a. Verify Krytox grease is applied to the O-rings and back up rings.
Figure 4-40: Loadcell alignment into lower 31-pin head
3. Line up the loadcell with the groove in the lower 31-pin head (T5013557).
4. Push the loadcell in until it has seated. Ensure that the loadcell shoulder has
bottomed out on the base of the head. You should feel both O-rings pass
into the seal bore.
5. Apply Loctite (B017648), to the threads of the retaining nut (T5013559).
Note
If the head leads are NOT installed, use care to avoid damaging the
feed-thru's during this operation. A slip of the wrench could bent the pin
end of a feed-thru. Visually check the feed-thru's when finished torquing
the retaining nut.
Private
6. Install the retaining nut (T5013559) using the loadcell installation/removal

tool (T5013564).
a. Torque the retaining nut to 30 ft-lbf, minimum.
7. Pack Krytox grease around the head leads to prevent mud from entering
the area.
4.17.2.10 Assembling Weakpoint Assembly onto Loadcell Assembly
Figure 4-41: Assembling the weakpoing assembly onto the loadcell assembly
1. Apply Lubriplate grease to the threads of the weakpoint assembly.
Note
Over torque will damage the weakpoint.
2. Screw the weakpoint assembly into the loadcell rod/piston (T5013561).

3. Use the wrench flat provided on the weakpoint.
4. Be sure to bottom these threads, but do not torque.
Private
Figure 4-42: Routing head leads through the weakpoint assembly
5. Route the head leads. See Figure 4-42: Routing head leads through the
weakpoint assembly.
a. Divide the leads into two sets.
b. Wrap the head leads around the loadcell rod and weakpoint.
c. Route each set of head leads through the weakpoint assembly
(100926943). See Figure 4-42: Routing head leads through the
weakpoint assembly above.
d. Adjust the wire so that the boot ends are located 3 in from the face of
the weakpoint head.
Figure 4-43: Adjusting the length of the head leads
Private
e. Tape the boots together with glass tape to avoid getting them caught
while installing the fishing bell as shown in Figure 4-43 above.
4.17.2.11 Assembling the Fishing Bell (H351343)

1. Align the fishing bell (H351343) so that it will line up with the key (H231894/
100926946) on the weakpoint assembly.
2. Also align the fishing bell key with the key on the lower 31-pin head
(T5013557).
Figure 4-44: Alignment key on weakpoint assembly and fishing bell
3. Slide the fishing bell into place.

4. Tighten the split ring (H350383).
5. Install the three thermometer housing assemblies.
a. Rotate the retaining collar (H351347) to provide full access to the
thermometer slots.
b. Install the thermometer assembly.
c. Rotate the retaining collar to cover the thermometer housing opening.
d. Apply Loctite to the screw (B013519).
e. Tighten the screw (B013519).
Private
4.17.2.12 Verify Head Insulation Resistance

1. Verify that head insulation resistance is 500 Mohms or better using a 500
VDC megger.
2. Verify that continuity resistance is less than 1 ohm using an ohmmeter.
3. Install male BCC plugs (H400320) into the female BCC if the head is not
attached to the cable immediately.
4.17.2.13 Install Outer Housing and Fishing Bell Extension
Note
Be careful to avoid pinching wires during this operation.
1. Carefully attach the rope socket housing (H701897) by latching on the "T" of
the weakpoint head (100926943).
2. Screw on the outer housing (H701907).
3. Secure the outer housing (H701907) with groove pin (B032902).
4. Screw on the fishing bell extension (H701908).
Figure 4-45: Installing the fishing bell extension (H701908)
5. Secure the fishing bell extension (H701908) with the spirol pin (B013394).
7. Install the O-ring (B022756) on the male thread protector (T1037599).
Private
8. Install the male thread protector (T1037599).

9. Stamp the LEH-PT with the four digit serial number, LEH-PT and the revision
number in 3/16 in letters.
Example: XXXX - LEH-PT

Where XXXX is the serial number followed by a space, a dash, a space,
then “LEH-PT”.
4.17.3 LEH-PT Operations
4.17.3.1 Equipment and Materials
1. Verify the LEH-PT software kit is available.

2. The telemetry cartridge needed to run the LEH-PT is HTGC-BB (STGC-BB
with UDFH-PLA) .
4.17.3.2 Tool Checklist
1. Perform mechanical checks in accordance with FIT-1 Mechanical.

2. Perform electrical checks in accordance with FIT-2 Electrical.
3. Perform operational checks in accordance with FIT-3 Operational.
4. Verify the correct placement of LEH-PT in the tool string.
5. Verify the loadcell calibration data is current.
4.17.3.3 Software Set-Up
Note
It is essential that the LEH-PT be calibrated and the correct “Gain” and “Offset”
entered into the OP software.
Private
1. Select LEH-PT from the LES under adapters in either “Open hole telemetry”
or “Case hole” section S.
2. Input the “Gain” into the OP software.
3. Input the offset into the OP software.
4.17.3.4 Maxwell Job Execution
Software Operation: Equipment Setup
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Head Tension Calibration

HTEN_CALI Calibration - -
Calibration type Manual
Head Tension multiplier
or manual entry gain
Private
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Head Tension shift or
manual entry offset
Weakpoint Configuration
Weakpoint configuration is performed by selecting the Weakpoint from the drop

down list for Weakpoint type property. Weakpoint can be either mechanical or
Software Operation: HTEN Calibration

Logging Surface.
Default /
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Value
Head Tension Zero
HTEN_ZM_REF Lbf 0.0 -2000 2000
Reference
Tool
Head Tension Plus
HTEN_PM_REF Lbf String -100 10000
Reference
Weight
Head Tension Zero
RHTE_ZM_BF Lbf 0.0 -300 300
Measurement
Tool
Head Tension Plus
RHTE_PM_BF Lbf String -15% +15%
Measurement
Weight
Private
Master Calibration

Software Operation: Log/Data Acquisition
Private
Measure Points
Data Gauges
Log Display
Channels
Measure
OSDD Code Description Measurement DOMAIN_DEPTHDOMAIN_ACQ Availability
Point
Raw Head
RHTE Head Tension Force 6 inch Yes Customer
Tension
HTEN Head Tension Head Tension Force 6 inch Yes Basic
LEH-MT and LEH-PT only

OSDD
Description Measure Point Measurement DOMAIN_DEPTH DOMAIN_ACQ Availability
Code
RHTE Raw Head Head Tension Force 6-in Yes Customer

Tension
HTEN Head Tension Head Tension Force 6-in Yes Basic
MTEM Mud Mud Temperature 6-in Yes Basic

Temperature Temperature
Software Operation: Processing
HTEN Computation

Units: lbf
Where,
Private


MTEM Computation

Units: degC
Where,
a = -243.4010
b = -1.178711e-02
c = 4.44480e-08
d = -3.04900e-13
Maxwell – OP Differences
This section lists the significant differences between the APS Maxwell and OP
implementations.
• Maxwell supports Head Tension Master and Before Logging Surface
calibrations.
cartridge. In Maxwell, these channels are RHTE and HTEN associated with
4.17.3.5 Performing Job Operations
1. Verify the “Neutral Load Reading” on the catwalk prior to operating the
LEH-PT.
Private
2. Monitor the tool tension on the I/O monitor during operations.

4.17.3.6 Post Job (Rig Down) Instructions
1. Verify “Neutral Load Reading” on the catwalk.

Note that the reading should be approximately the same as the initial reading
taken in the “Performing Job Preparations” section above.
4.17.4 LEH-PT Troubleshooting

The troubleshooting guide is intended to give the engineer or technician help in
locating the probable cause of failures in the LEH-PT. If the failure is isolated
down to the loadcell, send the loadcell back to HCS for analysis and repair.
Field repairs on the loadcell are not recommended. The sputter-deposited strain
element is very fragile and can be easily damaged if removed from it's protective
housing and mishandled.
If the failure is not located in the loadcell, then the problem is either in the 31-pin
adapter or the processing electronics. Problems with the 31-pin adapter may
be found with a Simpson meter and a circuit diagram. If the problem is isolated
to the TCC-B, troubleshoot using the MR#6 circuit diagram for the TCC-B. Use
the LEH-PT Troubleshooting table to locate the symptom of the failure and its
probable cause.
Table 4-24: LEH-PT Troubleshooting
Symptom Probable cause(s) Action

Remove 5-pin bulkhead;
Moisture in oil clean, flush oil and refill. If
Bridge IR to Mass low (less
strain element is electrically
than 40 Meg) Short on strain element shorted, send to SCD for
repair.
Isolate the open. If in 31-pin
3K ohms between any pin
Bridge open adapter, repair. If in loadcell,
combination (14,15,19,20)
send it to SCD.
Unshielded wires used, either
Shielded wire must be used
Noisy output in 31-pin adapter or TCC, or in
for sensor signal throughout.
31-pin jumper if used.
Private

DO NOT GO IN HOLE.
Leaking oil Damaged bladder or o-ring seal. Replace seals and piston, if
necessary, and oil-fill.
Check calibration procedure

Gain drifts and set up. This failure is
unlikely.
± 200 lbf is acceptable. If more Check drift by comparing
than 200 lbf, find source of drift no-load reading at surface
Offset drifts
(TCC or sensor). 31-pin jumpers to no-load reading at bottom
may also be the cause. hole.
4.18 LEH-QC
4.18.1 LEH-QC Disassembly
4.18.1.1 LEH-QC Cable to Head Disassembly

Refer to drawing H701916 and Bill of Materials in the appendices section.
1. Remove the snap ring (H329445) from the cone steel boot (H121961) using
needle-nose pliers.
2. Use a 3/16 in punch to drive out the spirol pin (B013813) from the boot.
3. Remove the two 1/4-20 screws (B018129) from the split boot, and remove
the two-halves from the rope socket housing (H701897).
4. Remove the spirol pin (B013394) from the extension fishing bell (H701908),
unscrew the bell, and slide it up the cable.
5. Using a 1/8 in punch, reverse out groove pin (B032902) from outer housing
(H701907), unscrew the outer housing, and slide it up the cable. Do not
drive through the groove pin.
Note
the pin.
Private
6. Disconnect BCC connections at the torpedo with connector disengage tool

(H245789).
7. Use internal snap ring pliers to remove retaining ring (B013711) from the rope
socket housing (H701897).

8. Disconnect the rope socket housing from weakpoint head (H245012/
100926943) by lifting and unhooking the tongue and groove latch.
9. Slide the cable forward to disengage the rope socket, and remove the cable
through the slot in the housing weldment (H701897).
10. Rotate the retaining collar (H245493) clockwise to open the thermometer
slots.
12. Use a spanner wrench (B003984) to unscrew the threaded ring (H222685).
13. Remove the fishing bell (H231884).
Note
14. Remove the head lead wires through the slots in the weakpoint head
assembly (H245012/ 100926943).
15. Use a 1/16 in punch to remove the spirol pin (B015544) from the weakpoint
head assembly.
16. Lift the assembly to remove it from the weakpoint support (H441737).
17. Rotate the weakpoint assembly counterclockwise to disengage the "J" slots.
18. Remove the weakpoint assembly.
19. Use a 9/16 in open-end wrench to separate the weakpoint support (H441738)
from the weakpoint and weakpoint support rod.
20. Use a boot extractor tool (H268423) to remove the boot retainer (100593948)
and female boot from the feedthrough connector.
Note
If the boot retainer or boots are stuck to the feedthrough connector, use a
Private
21. Remove the Allen screws (B016806) from the split threaded ring (H222685)
and remove it.
22. Use a 1/4 in deep socket to remove all ten feedthrough connectors
(H701353) and two blank-off plugs (H701640).
Note
Replace the O-rings every time these parts are removed from the head.
23. Remove the thread protector (H251929).

24. Use a SFT-121 installation and removal tool (H129804) to remove the 12-31
pin bulkhead to head adapter (H329672).
Note
This adapter does not have to be torn down at every head rebuild, but it must
be inspected for cracked insulators, damaged pins and lack of continuity
or insulation.
4.18.1.2 Disassembly of Bulkhead to Head Adapter (H329672)
1. Remove O-ring (B012828) from the lower assembly.

2. Remove three pan head screws (B029039) from the bulkhead to head
adapter (H329672), and separate the lower head (H441577) from the adapter
assembly (H245032).
3. From the uphole side of the adapter assembly, use a blue removal tool
(E018642) to punch out all twelve socket contacts (H222777).
4. From the downhole end of the lower head, use a black contact
removal/installation tool (H124244) to punch out the pin contacts (H222341).
5. Remove the wiring harness.
6. Use a 3/16 in drive punch to drive out the socket contact insulator (H230215)
from the adapter assembly (H245032).
Private
Note
These insulators are glued in. Do not reuse the insulator after it has
been removed. Clean all glue off the adapter assembly (H245032) before
assembly.
7. Use a black contact removal/installation tool (H124244) to punch out the pin
insulators (H329592) from the uphole side of the lower head.
4.18.2 LEH-QC Assembly

Refer to H701916 assembly drawing in the appendices section. The LEH-QC
contains the following subassemblies:
• H329672 – Bulkhead to head adapter assembly
• H245662 – Thermometer housing assembly.
Each of these subassemblies will have their own detailed assembly drawing and
Bill of Materials which are included in the appendices section.
If you cannot find a part on the H701916 Bill of Materials, check the subassembly
drawing and Bill of Materials where the part is contained.
4.18.2.1 LEH-QC Head Assembly

Refer to Drawing H701916 and Bill of Materials.
2. Using O-ring installation tool (H701899), install O-ring (B012416) on each
of ten plastic feedthrough connectors (H701353).
3. Install two blank-off plugs (H701640).
4. Install backup ring (H701881) on the two plugs closest to the threads.
5. Lubricate the O-ring installation tool with a light film of Lubriplate before using.
Private
6. Use a 1/4 in deep socket wrench with a 10 in-lb torque wrench (B033177)
to install the ten feedthrough connectors (H701353) and two blank-off plugs
(H701640) into head (H701309). Refer to the figure below.
7. Verify plugs go into holes #11 and #12.

8. Make sure the machined cavities that the feedthroughs screw into are clean
and dry.
9. Ensure that both the threads and the seal bore are clean to ensure proper
seating of the feedthrough and sealing of the O-ring.
10. Torque plastic feedthrough connectors to 10 in-lbs. Use torque wrench
(B033177). Refer to “Installation of Fluid-to-Air Connectors” procedure
(EH701944).
Private
11. If the LEH head will not be used with a bridle, you may use only eight head
leads (1-7 & 10), and plug holes #8 & #9 in the bulkhead, using plugs
(H701640) with the O-ring and backup ring called for in steps 1 & 2.
12. Lubricate split threaded ring (H222685) with Lubriplate grease (B021698)
and install it on the head (H701309) using the Allen screws (B016806)
13. Build the head leads using the following parts for use to 400 degF:
• H400313 – Viton female boots
• H245765 – Liner insulators
• H115576 – Socket contacts
• H122757 – Downhole hook-up wire.
14. Assemble the BCC-CC connectors as follows:

a. Cut ten 15.5 in lengths of hook-up wire and assemble them in accordance
with EH400327 “BCC-CC Connector Assembly Procedure.”
b. If the head is to be used at temperatures higher than 400 degF, use the
instructions listed in EH222614 “Assembly of Kalrez Boots.”
c. Ensure that your crimping tool is adjusted properly before crimping
sockets.
d. If using the coil spring boots and the shorter torpedo, cut the wires to
14-3/4 in.
15. Install the BCC on the feedthrough connectors #1 through #10 using a boot
retainer/extractor tool (H268423).
the boot.
c. Using a boot retainer tool (H268423), push the boot retainer (100593948)
with the gas vent slot facing the feedthrough until it stops.
Private
16. Hand pack DC-111 around the booted connector at the bulkhead if the head
will be exposed to cold temperatures (below freezing).
17. Select an appropriate modular weakpoint from the Weakpoints Appendix,
Heads Manual, Vol 2.

18. Screw the selected weakpoint into the weakpoint support (H441738).
19. Use Rutherford Red grease on this joint to avoid galling.
20. Screw the weakpoint adapter (H441737) on the weakpoint, and tighten it with
a 9/16 in open-end wrench.
21. Bottom the threaded joints without over-torquing. Use the wrench flat
provided on weakpoint adapter.
Note
If over-torqued, damage to weakpoint can occur.

23. Install two O-rings (B012764) on the "ears" of the weakpoint support
(H441738).
24. Install weakpoint support into the head by engaging the ears into the J-slots
on the upper end of the head.
25. Divide the leads into two groups and place them through the slots in the
weakpoint support.
26. Slip the weakpoint head (H245012/ 100926943) onto the weakpoint adapter.
a. Install spirol pin (B015544) into the weakpoint adapter using a 1/16 in
punch.
b. Line up the key on the head and the key on the bulkhead (H701309).
27. Adjust the wire length by wrapping them neatly around the weakpoint, so that
the boot ends are located 3 in from the face of the weakpoint head.
a. Feed the booted connectors and wires through the slots on the side of
the weakpoint head.
b. If you are using a coil spring boot and the shorter torpedo, the boots
should be located at 2-1/4 in from the weakpoint head. Refer to Figure
4-48.
Private
Figure 4-48: Head with weakpoint and leads installed
28. Install the fishing bell (H231884) over the weakpoint head.
a. Tape the boots together to avoid getting them caught while installing
the fishing bell.
b. Ensure the key on the head engages the key way in the lower end of
the fishing bell.
c. Verify the fishing bell in turn engages the key on the head (H701309)
before being made up by the split threaded ring (H222685).
d. Install the retaining spring collar (H245493) over the fishing bell.
e. Secure the collar using the screws called out on sections B-B and C-C
on the assembly drawing.
Private
29. Install three spirol pins (B013394) in the top of the fishing bell with a 3/16
in punch.
a. Install the three thermometer housing assemblies (H245662) into the
fishing bell by rotating the retaining spring collar (H245493) to open the
thermometer slots.
b. Refer to table below for a list of available thermometers.
Table 4-25: Available Thermometers
Thermometer Part No. Rating

H239552 60 degC – 330 degC
H239553 200 degC – 500 degC
H239554 400 degC – 650 degC
H327833 15 degC – 165 degC
H327834 90 degC – 260 degC
H327835 204 degC – 346 degC
Quality Note
Thermometers must be centrifuged in centrifuge (P075228) before
installing.
Thermometer housing assembly parts list:

• H245657 - thermometer housing
• H245661 - upper plug
• H245660 - lower plug
• B011870 - O-ring (2 required on each plug).
30. Verify that the wiring in the bulkhead to head adapter (H329672) matches
that shown on the assembly drawing (H701916).
a. Install the adapter into the head using SFT-121, cartridge pulling tool
(H129804).
b. Refer to the “Bulkhead to Head Adapter Assembly” section if rebuilding
is required.
31. Insert the 31-pin head extender (H245349) into the lower head and check
insulation and individual conductor continuity.
Private
a. Verify that head insulation resistance is 500 Mohm or better using a

500 V Megger.
b. Verify that continuity resistance is less than 1 omh.
32. If the head is not to be immediately attached to a cable, install male BCC
plugs (H400320) into the female BCC in the torpedo.
33. Carefully attach the rope socket housing (H701897) by latching on the "T" of
the weakpoint head (H245012/ 100926943).
Note
Be careful to avoid pinching wires during this operation.
34. Screw on the outer housing (H701907), and secure it with groove pin
(B032902).
35. Screw on the fishing bell extension (H701908), and secure it with spirol pin
(B013394).
36. Install O-ring (B012828) on the thread protector (H251929), and install the
thread protector on the lower head.
4.18.2.2 Bulkhead to Head Adapter Assembly (H329672)

Refer to the following drawings:
• Drawing H329672 and Bill of Materials (Bulkhead to Head Adapter)
• Drawing H441577 and Bill of Materials (Head, Lower, 31 Contact)
• Drawing H245032 and Bill of Materials (Adapter Assembly 3-3/8 Head).
1. Install 31-pin insulators (H329592) into the lower head (H441577).

a. Lightly lubricate each O-ring on the insulators before installing.
b. Install the pin insulators from the lower end.
c. Verify the insulators snap into place.
2. Use the black contact removal / installation tool (H124244) to install 19-pin
contacts (H222341) into the lower head insulators (H329592).
a. Install the pin contacts from the uphole side.
b. Install into pin holes #11 through #27, #30 and #31.
Private
3. Mix epoxy compound (B015112) according to the instructions on the package.

a. Glue in 12-socket contact insulators (H230215) into the adapter assembly
(H245032).
b. Install them from the uphole direction.
c. Use the epoxy compound sparingly.
4. Cut ten separate 7-1/2 in lengths of 20 AWG wire (E025809).

a. On one end, crimp the pin contacts (H222341).
b. Use the crimping instructions listed in document T1000751.
5. Cut two 3-1/2 in lengths of 20 AWG wire (E025809), and splice into any
two of the assembled wires.
a. Splicing instructions are listed on this assembly drawing.
b. After you finish the two splices, you will have a 10 to 12 lead wire harness
with the male contact pins assembled.
6. Take 12 socket contacts (H222777) and crimp one each on the wire leads.
Crimp per instructions, T1000751.
7. Cut a 2-1/2 in length of 20 AWG wire (E025809).
a. Crimp one pin contact (H222341) on each end of the wire.
b. Crimp per instructions T1000751.
Note
This is the #28 to #29 head jumper which provides the clock turnaround
for CTS telemetry.
8. Install the assembled wires according to the wiring diagram on drawing

H701916 (bottom left).
9. Use the black installation / removal tool (H124244) to install male pin ends
into the lower head insulators, from the uphole side. The pin contacts will
snap into place.
10. Use the red insertion tool (E029023) to install socket contacts into glued
insulators in the adapter assembly (H245032) from the downhole side. The
socket contacts will snap into place.
Private
11. Mate the two sections together and align the screw holes.
a. Rotate one end to take up slack in the wire harness, as necessary.
b. Install three pan head screws (B029039).
Note
If your adapter is old, there will be three spirol pins (B015237) instead of
three pan head screws. Rework the parts for use with the screws. See
drawings H441578, H441176, H329672.
12. Check insulation and continuity and correct the wire distribution according to
the wiring diagram on the assembly drawing H701916 (bottom left).
4.18.2.3 Attaching the Cable to the Head
1. Use BCC-CC style connectors to connect the wires within the torpedo.
2. Refer to drawing EH400327, “BCC-CC Connector Assembly Procedure”
for instructions.
4.18.2.4 Torpedo Assembly to LEH-QC Logging Head
1. Assemble the cone type rope socket.

2. Assemble and install the male BCC-C connectors per EH400327 make-up
procedure.
3. Slide the fishing bell extension (H701908) over the rope socket and up the
cable.
4. Slide the outer housing (H701907) over the rope socket and up the cable.
5. Put the cable through the slot rope socket housing (H701897), and seat the
rope socket into the rope socket housing.
Note
The notch in the rope socket outer housing will engage the anti-torque lug
welded inside the rope socket housing.
Private
6. Install retaining ring (B013711) into the groove inside the housing weldment
using internal snap ring pliers.
Note
Do not fail to install the retaining ring!
7. Connect rope socket housing to the weakpoint head of LEH-QC. Care should
be taken when engaging the "T" lock so as not to pinch or cut the head leads.
8. Connect the cable conductors to the head leads according to EH400327
Assembly Procedure.
Note
Now is a good time to check insulation and correct conductor continuity from
either the collector or the SOM or WOM module inside the unit.
9. Slide outer housing (H701907) down the cable and screw it to the weakpoint
head assembly (H245012/ 100926943). Lubricate the threads with Lubriplate
grease before attaching.
Note
When removing groove pin, reverse it out of the hole. Do not drive it through
the hole.
10. Install groove pin (B032902) into the pilot hole in the upper end of outer
housing (H701907).
Note
Do not replace this groove pin with a spirol pin.
11. Slide the fishing bell extension (H701908) down the cable and screw it to the
fishing bell (H231884). Lubricate the threads with Lubriplate grease before
attaching it.
Private
12. Install spirol pin (B013394) into the pilot hole in the fishing bell extension.
13. Install the appropriate sized cone steel boot.
a. Select the appropriate steel boots for the various cable sizes from the
table below.
Table 4-26: Cone Steel Boots for Various Cable Sizes
Cone steel boot Cable size

H121961 7–46
H350706 7–42
101608481 7–52, 7–53
H125568 7–39
H125569 1–32
H701572 1–25
b. To install the cone steel boot, join the two halves of the boot onto the
corresponding groove on the housing (H701897).
c. Thread in the two 1/4-20 screws.
d. Install the spirol pin (B013813), using a 3/16 in punch.
e. Install the snap ring (H329445) using needle-nose pliers.
4.19 LEH-QE
4.19.1 LEH-QE Disassembly

The LEH-QE Disassembly procedure is similar to the one for the LEH-QC. Refer
to Section 4.18: LEH-QC and Appendix F.
4.19.2 LEH-QE Assembly

See Tech Alert 6354509 in the appendices section of Vol. II.
The LEH-QE Assembly procedure is similar to the one for the LEH-QC. Refer to
Section4.18: LEH-QC and Appendix F.
Private
4.20 LEH-QT
Refer to the LEH-QT Maintenance SWI SLS-1, InTouch # 6588887, for assembly
and disassembly instructions.
4.20.1 Operations- Maxwell Job Execution

Lower Upper
Limit Limit
manual entry gain
entry offset
Private

Logging Surface.
Default /
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Value
Tool String
Weight
Tool String
Weight
Master Calibration

Private
Zero Accumulation
Plus Accumulation

Measure Points
Private

Data Gauges

Log Display

Channels
OSDD Measure
Code Point
Raw Head Head
Tension Tension
Head Head
Tension Tension

HTEN Computation

Units: lbf
Where,
Private


MTEM Computation

Units: degC
Where,
a = -243.4010
b = -1.178711e-02
c = 4.44480e-08
d = -3.04900e-13

implementations.
calibrations.
4.20.2 Troubleshooting guide

The troubleshooting guide is intended to give the engineer or technician help in
locating the probable cause of failures in the LEH-QT. If the failure is isolated
down to the loadcell, send the loadcell back to HCS for analysis and repair.
Private
Field repairs on the loadcell are not recommended. The sputter-deposited strain
element is very fragile and can be easily damaged if removed from it's protective
housing and mishandled.
Figure 4-49: Loadcell (100353269) mounting in head (H701315)
If the failure is not located in the loadcell, then the problem is either in the 31-pin
adapter or the processing electronics. Problems with the 31-pin adapter may be
found with a Simpson meter and a circuit diagram. If the problem is isolated to
the TCC-B, troubleshoot using the MR#6 circuit diagram for the TCC-B.
Use the following table to locate the symptom of the failure and its probable
cause.
Table 4-33: LEH-QT (With DLC) Failure Symptoms and Probable Causes

Bridge IR to Mass low (less -Short on strain element If strain element is electrically
than 40 Meg) shorted, send to HCS for
repair.
3K ohms between any pin -Bridge open Isolate the open. If in 31 pin
combination (14,15,19,20) on adapter, repair. If in loadcell,
the 31 pin adapter send it to HCS.
Noisy output -Unshielded wires used, either Properly shielded and ground
in 31-pin adapter or TCC, or in wires must be used for sensor
31-pin jumper if used. signal throughout.
Gain drifts Check calibration procedure
and set up. This failure is
unlikely.
Offset drifts -± 200 lbf is acceptable. If Check drift by comparing
more than 200 lbf, find source no-load reading at surface
of drift. Check 31- pin adapter, to no-load reading at bottom
telemetry cartridge or any hole.
jumper leads, if used.
No Signal 5-pin connector on DLC not Pin check DLC and verify
properly oriented. Telemetry proper wiring.
cartridge lacks functionality or
has failed. Wiring failure.
Private
Table 4-34: LEH-QT (Without DLC) Failure Symptoms and Probable Causes

Bridge IR to Mass low - Moisture in oil- Remove 5 pin bulkhead; clean,
(less than 40 Meg) - Short on strain element flush oil and refill. If strain
element is electrically shorted,
send to VPC for repair.
3K ohms between any pin - Bridge open Isolate the open. If in 31 pin
combination (14,15,19,20) adapter, repair. If in loadcell,
send it to VPC.
Noisy output - Unshielded wires used, either in Shielded wire must be used for
31-pin adapter or TCC, or in 31 sensor signal throughout.
pin jumper if used.
Leaking oil - Damaged bladder or O-ring DO NOT GO IN HOLE.
seal. Replace seals and piston, if
necessary, and oil-fill.
Gain drifts Check calibration procedure
and set up. This failure is
unlikely.
Offset drifts - ± 200 lbf is acceptable. If more Check drift by comparing
than 200 lbf, find source of drift no-load reading at surface to
(TCC or sensor). 31 pin jumpers no-load reading at bottom hole.
may also be the cause.
4.21 LEH-ST
4.21.1 LEH-ST Disassembly
Note
When ECRD-G/H is used, the weakpoint head weldment must be PN
Private
In addition, the ECRD-G/H must be run with the extension rod (101595831) and
the fishing bell PN 100994568. The weakpoint head weldment PN 100926943,
the extension rod (101595831) and the fishing bell PN 100994568 are included
in the LEH-ST ECRD-G/H Installation Kit PN 101122790.
in Appendix Z.For more information regarding the ECRD kit, refer to ECRD-E/F
4.21.1.1 Disassemble the LEH-ST Cable to Head

Refer to drawing H351344 and the Bill of Materials in the appendices section.
1. Remove the snap ring (H329445) from the fishing neck assembly
(100247501) using needle-nose pliers. (Note that there are several options
for fishing neck assemblies.)
2. Use a 3/16 in punch to drive out the spirol pin (B013813) from the fishing
neck.
3. Remove the two 1/4-20 screws (100320987) from the fishing neck assembly,
and remove the two-halves from the rope socket housing weldment
(H701897).
4. Remove the spirol pin (B013394) from the extension fishing bell (H701908),
Note
the pin.
5. Using a 1/8 in punch, reverse out groove pin (B032902) from outer housing
(H701907), unscrew the outer housing, and slide it up the cable. Do not
drive through the groove pin.
6. Unscrew the bell, and slide it up the cable.
7. Disconnect the BCC connections at the torpedo with connector disengage
tool (H245789).
8. Use internal snap ring pliers to remove retaining Truarc ring (B013711) from
the housing weldment (H701897).
9. Slide the cable forward to disengage the rope socket, and remove the cable
through the slot in the housing weldment (H701897).
Private
10. Rotate the retaining collar (H351347) clockwise to open the thermometer
slots.
12. Use a spanner wrench (B003984) to unscrew the threaded ring (H350383).
Note
13. Remove the fishing bell (H351343).

14. Use a 1/16 in punch to remove the spirol pin (B015544) from the weakpoint
head assembly.
15. Lift the assembly to remove it from the weakpoint adapter (H441737).
16. Rotate the weakpoint assembly counterclockwise to disengage the "J" slots.
17. Remove the weakpoint assembly.
18. Use a 9/16 in open-end wrench to separate the weakpoint support from the
weakpoint and piston rod (H351348).
Note
If the boot retainer or boots are stuck to the feedthrough connector, use a
19. Use a boot extractor tool (H268423) to remove the boot retainer (100593948)
and female boot from the feedthrough connector.
20. Remove the Allen screws (B016806) from the split threaded ring (H350383)
and remove it.
21. Use a 1/4 in deep socket to remove all ten feedthrough connectors
(H701352).
Note
Replace the O-rings (B012416) every time these parts are removed from
the head.
22. Remove the thread protector (J957803).
Private
23. Use a SFT-121 installation and removal tool (H129804) to remove the
bulkhead-to-head adapter (100289177 - ECRD board; H351340 - no ECRD
board).
Note
The bulkhead-to-head adapter does not have to be torn down at every head
rebuild, but it must be inspected for cracked insulators, damaged pins and
lack of continuity or insulation.
4.21.1.2 Disassemble the Bulkhead to Head Adapter (H351340)
Alignment Ground Spirol O-ring O-ring Plug

Pin Lug Pins B036346 B029541 J957949
H351345 H135994 B017024
Contact
Block
100357035
Spring
H129818
Insulators
H230215 2.5" Lower
Head
J957948
Sockets Retainer Surge 31-Pin Contact Pins
H222777 H351337 Arrestor Insulator H222776
E050573 H351324
Figure 4-50: H351340, Lower Head Assembly
1. Remove O-ring (B036346) from the 2-1/2 in lower head (J957948).

2. Remove three spirol pins (B017024) from the 2-1/2 in lower head (J957948)
and separate the lower head (J957948) from the retainer (H351337).
Private
3. From the uphole side of the adapter assembly (H351341), use removal tool
(E035987) to punch out all fifteen (15) socket contacts (H222776).
4. From the downhole end of the lower head, use removal tool (E035987) to
punch out the pin contacts (H222776).

5. De-solder the surge arrester (E050573) from the ground lug (H135994).
6. Remove the wiring harness.
7. Use a 3/16 in drive punch to drive out the socket contact insulator (H230215)
from the retainer (H351337).
Note
These insulators are glued in. Do not reuse the insulator after it has
been removed. Clean all glue off the adapter assembly (H351337) before
assembly.
4.21.1.3 Disassemble the Loadcell Assembly (H351342).

Note that the bulkhead-to-head assembly (H351340) and the weakpoint
assembly must be removed prior to removing the loadcell assembly from the
fishing bell (H351343). Reference drawing H351342 and the bill of materials in
the appendices section.
Private
Slyde Back-up 5-pin Retainer

Spring Quad ring Nut (2) Housing O-ring (2) Pin feedthru
ring ring B024533 ring
H352107 B035365 B035374 B035373 H712027 H352063 B009656 H701893 H352067
Retaining
ring
H701312
O-ring - B013339
Back-up ring - H701624
(two places)
Back-up Quad ring Slyde Hex Strain Oil fill plug - H352073
Piston rod ring B035193 ring Piston coupler element O-ring Socket Adapter Contact
H351348 B035191 H352065 H352066 B013751 E037617 H352064 block with
B035195 H701463 O-ring - B020705
(inside) H701988
(not shown)
Figure 4-51: Loadcell Assembly (H351342)
Private
1. Remove the retaining ring (H352067).

2. Remove the loadcell assembly (H351342) from the fishing bell (H351343)
3. Remove the housing (H352063) from the adapter (H352064).
4. Unscrew the piston rod (H351348) from the hex coupler (H352066).
5. Remove the piston (H352065) from the piston rod (H351348).
6. Remove the compression spring (H352107) from the piston rod (H351348).
7. Remove and replace the following six items on the piston (H352065):
Slyde Ring Quad Ring

B035365 Back-up Ring B035373
B035374
Quad Ring
Back-up Ring B035193 Slyde Ring
B035195 B035191
8. Remove the retaining ring (H701312) from the adapter (H352064).
9. Extract the 5-pin feedthru (H701893) from the adapter (H352064).
10. Remove the contact block (H701988) from the adapter (H352064).
11. Punch out the five (5) contact sockets (E037617) from the contact block
(H701988).
12. Back-off the nut (H712027) from the hex coupler (H352066).
13. Remove the hex coupler (H352066).
14. Back off the nut (H712027) from the adapter (H352064).
15. Remove the strain element (H701463) while slowely removing the wires
from the adapter (H352064).
Private
4.21.2 LEH-ST Assembly

Note
In addition, the ECRD-G/H must be run with the extension rod (101595831) and
the fishing bell (100994568). The weakpoint head weldment PN 100926943, the
extension rod (101595831) and the fishing bell (100994568) are included in the
LEH-ST ECRD-G/H Installation Kit (101122790).
in Appendix Z. For more information regarding the ECRD kit, refer to ECRD-E/F
The assembly of the LEH-ST tool is similar to the LEH-QT tool. The only
difference is that the slim 2-1/2 in downhole components are substituted for the
standard LEH-QT components. These components can be identified by referring
to the drawing H351344 (included in this manual). The uphole components on
the LEH-ST are identical to the uphole components on the LEH-QT.
Refer to the H351344 assembly drawing in the appendices section. The LEH-ST
contains the following subassemblies:
• H351340 – Bulkhead to head adapter assembly
• H245662 – Thermometer housing assembly
• H351342 – Loadcell assembly
Each of these subassemblies will have their own detailed assembly drawing and
Bill of Materials which are included in the appendices section.
If you cannot find a part on the H351344 Bill of Materials, check the subassembly
drawing and Bill of Materials where the part is contained.
4.21.2.1 LEH-ST Head Assembly

Refer to Drawing H351344 and the Bill of Materials.
Private
1. Lubricate the O-ring installation tool (H701899) with a light film of Lubriplate
before using.

3. Using O-ring installation tool (H701899), install O-ring (B012416) on each
of ten plastic feedthrough connectors (H701352).
4. Use a 1/4 in deep socket wrench with a 10 in-lb torque wrench (B033177)
to install the ten feedthrough connectors (H701352) into the lower head
(H351336).
5. Make sure the machined cavities that the feedthroughs screw into are clean
and dry.
6. Ensure that both the threads and the seal bore are clean to ensure proper
seating of the feedthrough and sealing of the O-ring.
Private
7. Torque plastic feedthrough connectors to 10 in-lbs. Use torque wrench

(B033177). Refer to “Installation of Fluid-to-Air Connectors” procedure
(EH701944).
8. If the LEH will not be used with a bridle, you may use only eight head leads
(1-7 & 10), and plug holes #8 & #9 in the bulkhead, using plugs (H701640)
with the O-ring (B012416).
9. Lubricate split threaded ring (H350383) with Lubriplate grease (B021698)
and install it on the fishing bell (H351343) using the Allen screws (B016806)
10. If the wire set (100334770) is not available, perform the following:
a. Build the head leads using the following parts for use to 400 degF:
• H400313 – Viton female boots
• H245765 – Liner insulators
• H115576 – Socket contacts
• H122757 – Heavy insulated hook-up wire.
b. Assemble the BCC-CC connectors as follows:

i. Cut ten 20 in lengths of hook-up wire and assemble them in
accordance with EH400327 “BCC-CC Connector Assembly
Procedure.”
ii. If the head is to be used at temperatures higher than 400 degF, use
the instructions listed in EH222614 “Assembly of Kalrez Boots.”
iii. Ensure that your crimping tool is adjusted properly before crimping
sockets.
iv. If using the coil spring boots and the shorter torpedo, cut the wires
to 14-3/4 in.
11. Install the assembled head leads or wire set (100334770) on the feedthrough
connectors #1 through #10 using boot retainer tool (H268423).
the boot.
c. Using a boot retainer tool (H268423), push the boot retainer (100593948)
with the gas vent slot facing the feedthrough until it stops.
Private
12. Hand pack DC-111 around the booted connector at the bulkhead if the head
will be exposed to cold temperatures (below freezing).
13. Select an appropriate modular weakpoint.
14. Screw the selected weakpoint into the piston rod (H351348).
15. Use Rutherford Red grease on this joint to avoid galling.
16. Screw the weakpoint adapter (H441737) on the weakpoint, and tighten it with
a 9/16 in open-end wrench.
Note
If over-torqued, damage to weakpoint can occur.
17. Bottom the threaded joints without over-torquing. Use the wrench flat
provided on weakpoint adapter.
19. Adjust the wire length by wrapping them neatly around the weakpoint, so that
the boot ends are located 3 in from the face of the weakpoint head.
a. Feed the booted connectors and wires through the slots on the side of
the weakpoint head (H245005/ 100927222).
b. If you are using a coil spring boot and the shorter torpedo, the boots
should be located at 2-1/4 in from the weakpoint head. Refer to Figure
4-54.
Private
Figure 4-54: Head with weakpoint and leads installed
20. Install the fishing bell (H351343) over the weakpoint head.
a. Tape the boots together to avoid getting them caught while installing
the fishing bell.
b. Ensure the key on the lower lines up with the key way in the lower end of
the fishing bell (H351343).
c. Verify the fishing bell in turn engages the key on the lower head
(H351336) before being made up by the split threaded ring (H350383).
d. Install the retaining collar (H351347) over the fishing bell.
e. Secure the collar using the screws (B013519).
Private
21. Install three spirol pins (B013394) in the top of the fishing bell with a 3/16
in punch.
a. Install the three thermometer housing assemblies (H245662) into
the fishing bell by rotating the retaining collar (H351347) to open the
thermometer slots.
b. Refer to table below for a list of available thermometers.
Table 4-35: Available Thermometers
Thermometer Part No. Rating

H239552 60 degC – 330 degC
H239553 200 degC – 500 degC
H239554 400 degC – 650 degC
H327833 15 degC – 165 degC
H327834 90 degC – 260 degC
H327835 204 degC – 346 degC
Thermometer housing assembly parts list:

• H245657 - thermometer housing
• H245661 - upper plug
• H245660 - lower plug
• B041754 - O-ring (2 required on each plug).
22. Verify that the wiring in the bulkhead to lower head adapter assembly
(H351341) matches that shown on the assembly drawing (H351340).
a. Install the bulkhead to head adapter into the lower head.
b. Refer to the “Bulkhead to Head Adapter Assembly” section if rebuilding
is required.
23. Insert the 31-pin head extender into the lower head for insulation and
individual conductor continuity.
a. Verify that head lead wires insulation resistance is 500 Mohm or better
using a 500 V Megger.
b. Verify that continuity resistance (all lines except 14, 15, 19 & 20, lower
end to upper end) is less than 1 ohm.
• LH 14 to LH 15 resistance is 1000 ±100 ohm.
• LH 19 to LH 20 resistance is 1000 ±150 ohm.
Private
24. If the head is not to be immediately attached to a cable, install male BCC
plugs (H400320) into the female BCC in the torpedo.
Note
Be careful to avoid pinching wires during the following operation.
25. Carefully attach the housing weldment (H701897) by latching on the "T" of
the weakpoint head weldment (H245012/ 100926943).
26. Screw on the outer housing (H701907), and secure it with groove pin
(B032902).
27. Screw on the fishing bell extension (H701908), and secure it with spirol pin
(B013394).
28. Install O-ring (B003526) on the thread protector (J957803), and install the
thread protector on the lower head.
4.21.2.2 Bulkhead to Head Adapter Assembly (H351340)

Refer to the following drawings: H351340 and H351341.
1. Install 31-pin insulators (H230215) into the retainer (H351337).

a. Install the pin insulators (H230215) from the uphole end.
b. Verify the insulators (H230215) snap into place.
2. Cut ten separate 7-1/2 in lengths of 20 AWG wire (E025809).

a. On one end, crimp the pin contacts (H222776) per specification
T1000751.
3. Cut two 3-1/2 in lengths of 20 AWG wire (E025809), and splice into any two
of the assembled wires from Step 2 above.
a. Splicing instructions are listed on this assembly drawing.
b. After you finish the two splices, you will have a 10 to 12 lead wire harness
with the male contact pins assembled.
4. Take 15 socket contacts (H222777) and crimp one each on the wire leads.
Crimp per instructions, T1000751.
5. Cut a 2-1/2 in length of 20 AWG wire (E025809).
Private
a. Crimp one pin contact (H222341) on each end of the wire.

b. Crimp per instructions T1000751.
Note
This is the #28 to #29 head jumper which provides the clock turnaround
for CTS telemetry.
6. Install the assembled wires according to the wiring diagram on drawing

H351340.
7. Use the black installation / removal tool (H124244) to install sockets
(H222777) into the lower head insulators, from the uphole side. The sockets
will snap into place.
8. Use the red insertion tool (E029023) to install pins (H222776) into the 31-pin
contact insulator (H351924) from the downhole side. The pins will snap
into place.
9. Mate the two sections together and align the spirol pin holes.
a. Rotate one end to take up slack in the wire harness, as necessary.
b. Install three spirol pins (B017024).
Note
If your adapter is old, there will be three spirol pins (B015237) instead of
three pan head screws. Rework the parts for use with the screws. See
drawings H441578, H441176, H329672.
10. Check insulation and continuity and correct the wire distribution according to
the wiring diagram on the assembly drawing H351340.
4.21.2.3 Attaching the Cable to the Head
1. Use BCC-CC style connectors to connect the wires within the torpedo.
Private
2. Refer to drawing EH400327, “BCC-CC Connector Assembly Procedure”

for instructions.
4.21.2.4 Torpedo Assembly to LEH-ST Logging Head
1. Assemble the cone type rope socket.

2. Assemble and install the male BCC-C connectors per EH400327 make-up
procedure.
3. Slide the fishing bell extension (H701908) over the rope socket and up the
cable.
4. Slide the outer housing (H701907) over the rope socket and up the cable.
5. Put the cable through the slot rope socket housing (H701897), and seat the
rope socket into the rope socket housing.
6. Install retaining ring (B013711) into the groove inside the housing weldment
using internal snap ring pliers.
Note
Do not fail to install the retaining ring!
Failure to install the retaining ring may cause electrical and mechanical
damage to the tools.
7. Connect housing weldment (H701897) to the weakpoint head (H245005/

100927222) of the LEH-ST. Care should be taken when engaging the "T" lock
so as not to pinch or cut the head leads.
8. Connect the cable conductors to the head leads according to EH400327
Assembly Procedure.
Note
Now is a good time to check insulation and correct conductor continuity from
either the collector or the SOM or WOM module inside the unit.
9. Lubricate the weakpoint head weldment (H245012/ 100926943) threads with

Lubriplate grease before attaching.
Private
10. Slide the outer housing (H701907) down the cable and screw it to the
weakpoint head weldment (H245012/ 100926943).
Note
When removing the groove pin, reverse it out of the hole. Do not drive it
through the hole. This is a directional pin.
11. Install groove pin (B032902) into the pilot hole in the upper end of outer
housing (H701907).
Note
Do not replace this groove pin with a spirol pin.
12. Lubricate the fishing bell extension (H701908) threads with Lubriplate.
13. Slide the fishing bell extension (H701908) down the cable and screw it to
the fishing bell (H351343).
14. Install the spirol pin (B013394) into the pilot hole in the fishing bell extension.
15. Install the appropriate sized cone steel boot.
a. Select the appropriate steel boots for the various cable sizes from the
table below.
Table 4-36: Cone Steel Boots for Various Cable Sizes
Cone steel boot Cable size

H121961 7–46
H350706 7–42
101608481 7–52, 7–53
H125568 7–39
H125569 1–32
H701572 1–25
b. To install the fishing neck (100247501), join the two halves of the boot
onto the corresponding groove on the housing (H701897).
c. Thread in the four 1/4-20 screws (10032087).
d. Install the spirol pin (B013813), using a 3/16 in punch.
Private
e. Install the snap ring (H329445) using needle-nose pliers.

4.21.3 Operations- Maxwell Job Execution

Lower Upper
Limit Limit
manual entry gain
entry offset
Private

Logging Surface.
Default /
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Value
Tool String
Weight
Tool String
Weight
Master Calibration

Private
Zero Accumulation
Plus Accumulation

Measure Points
Private

Data Gauges

Log Display

Channels
OSDD Measure
Code Point
Raw Head Head
Tension Tension
Head Head
Tension Tension

HTEN Computation

Units: lbf
Where,
Private


MTEM Computation

Units: degC
Where,
a = -243.4010
b = -1.178711e-02
c = 4.44480e-08
d = -3.04900e-13

implementations.
calibrations.
Private
4.22 LEH-QO
4.22.1 LEH-QO Assembly

The assembly procedure for the oil-filled head is detailed fully in the second page
of the kit drawing (H701470). The drawing shows and explains the procedure
step by step, including oil-filling. The kit contains all the parts required to convert
to an OFH. Basically, only the lower end is changed. The top half remains
identical with the standard LEH-QC.
4.23 LEH-RC
4.23.1 LEH-RC Disassembly

Disassembly of the LEH-RC follows the general disassembly procedures detailed
in the LEH-QC section. The uphole parts are common between the two heads;
only the downhole components are different.
4.23.2 LEH-RC Assembly

Assembly of the LEH-RC follows the general assembly procedures detailed in
the LEH-QC section. The uphole parts are common between the two heads; only
the downhole components are different.
4.24 Hook-up Wire Installation for the ECRD

Improper installation of hook-up wires around the ECRD can cause damage to
the hook-up wires during operations (Figure 4-55). When there is not enough
clearance between the ECRD and the thermometer housings gouging may occur
to the hook-up wires.
Private
Figure 4-55: Improper routing of hook-up wires around the ECRD
Follow the instructions below when installing the ECRD.

1. Remove the thermometer housings from the head.
2. Place a mark on the ECRD weakpoint where the thermometer housings
line up.
Private
Figure 4-56: Place marks on the ECRD indicating thermometer housing location
3. Remove the section of the head containing the thermometer housings.

The markings on the ECRD should be visible.
4. Make sure the marks are not on the flat part of the ECRD. If they are, slighly
back the ECRD out so that when you re-mark, the marking are on the
rounded part of the ECRD. Repeat until correct.
Do not overtorque the ECRD to make it fit.
5. Cut the hook-up wires (H122757) to the length specified in the assembly
section of logging equipment heads. Increase the length as necessary.
Figure 4-57: Positioning hook-up wires on the ECRD
6. Lay the hook-up wires flat.

7. Position the hook-up wires to avoid the thermometer housing marks.
8. Lightly wrap with heat tape to keep the wires in place.
Private
Quality Note
Exercise CAUTION when using the LEH Safety Clamp with the ECRD.
The LEH safety clamp (100047555) is not required for operations with the ECRD.
This accessory was released as a method to control the accidental release of the
ECRD-B. This issue has since been solved with the newer versions, ECRD-E.
Locations which already have this accessory may remove this tool from service.
Should the location wish to continue using the accessory for any other purpose,
extra caution should be taken when assembling the clamp to the LEH housing.
Failure reports from the field have shown that the clamp can damage the head
wires as seen below.
4.25 Fishing
4.25.1 Fishing Method

The heads with the downhole tools can be fished by the fishing kits using
different grapple sizes.
Previously, the fishing kit SFT-157 (H244869, Obsolete) and the slimhole fishing
kit SFT-404 (H360171, Obsolete) which engage the fishing neck on the heads
were used. It has been discovered that tool retrieval by engaging the larger and
longer tool body increases the chance of tool recovery in comparison to the
retrieval by catching logging heads.
The fishing kit SFT-644 (100121542, Tool OD from 2-3/8 in to 3-5/8 in), the
slimhole fishing kit SFT-651 (100121468, Tool OD from 1-11/16 in to 2-3/8 in) and
the fishing kit SFT -709 (10030755, Tool OD from 2-3/8 in to 3-5/8 in, for thick
wall drillpipes) are the currently standard fishing kits. These fishing kits catch the
tool body instead of the fishing neck on the heads.
During the preparation of the fishing downhole assembly, it is important to identify

the sizes of the tool and head being fished and use a new grapple of the correct
size. For more details of fishing operation, refer to Wireline Fishing Manual
(InTouch # 4172213).
Alternatively, the 3rd party fishing tools such as OTIS fishing tools can be used
on the wireline or slickline. The tool engages the industry standard fishing neck
of the MH-22, PEH-E, PEH-EF/ EFA, PEK-KD and PEH-L. This is the most
common method of fishing in holes smaller than 4.5 in ID. With this method, the
weakpoint is pulled out before the fishing operation.
Private
4.25.2 Pulling Weakpoint

When the weakpoint is pulled from the PEH-E/EF/L/KD, the upper housing
comes out of the hole with the cable, exposing the industry standard fishing neck.
Figure 4-58: The industry standard fishing neck appears after upper housing
is pulled with the weakpoint (PEH-E/EF/L/KD)
When the weakpoint is pulled from the logging equipment head, the outer
housing (H701907, 1.75 in OD) is pulled off when the weakpoint is broken during
fishing. For PEH-AB, Split Torpedo Housing (H105314, 1.469 OD) is pulled off
when the weakpoint is broken.
Figure 4-59: Outer housing pulled off when the weakpoint is broken
in LEHs (example LEH-PT)
For more details of head dimensions for the fishing operations, refer to Wireline
Fishing Manual, InTouch Content 4172213.
Private
5-i Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Maintenance 5-i
5 Maintenance
5.1 General Information ____________________________________________ 5-1
5.2 O-ring Practices ________________________________________________ 5-2

5.3 Lubrication Guidelines _________________________________________ 5-3
5.3.1 Lubriplate Grease (B013366) _________________________________ 5-4
5.3.2 Rutherford Slick-Stuf #4 Grease (B022197) ____________________ 5-4
5.3.3 Mystik JT-6 Hi Temp Multi-purpose Grease (B039178) __________ 5-5
5.3.4 Krytox GPL-206 Grease (B039179) ___________________________ 5-5
5.3.5 DC-111 (B-021698) __________________________________________ 5-5
5.3.6 Silicone DC-200 Oil (B022152) _______________________________ 5-6
5.4 Worn Parts Replacement Guidelines ___________________________ 5-6
5.4.1 Pins ________________________________________________________ 5-6
5.4.2 Groove Pins ________________________________________________ 5-6
5.4.3 Screws _____________________________________________________ 5-7
5.4.4 Threaded Parts _____________________________________________ 5-7
5.5 Monocable Heads ______________________________________________ 5-8
5.5.1 FIT-1 Mechanical ____________________________________________ 5-8
5.5.2 FIT-2 Electrical ______________________________________________ 5-9
5.5.3 TRIM-1 Mechanical _________________________________________ 5-10
5.6 PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E ______________________________________ 5-11
5.6.1 FIT-1 Mechanical ___________________________________________ 5-11
5.6.2 FIT-2 Electrical _____________________________________________ 5-12
5.6.3 TRIM-1 Mechanical _________________________________________ 5-14
5.7 PEK-BD, PEK-BE, PEK-F ______________________________________ 5-15
5.8 Perforating Equipment Heads _________________________________ 5-15
5.8.1 FIT-1 Mechanical ___________________________________________ 5-15
5.8.2 FIT-2 Electrical _____________________________________________ 5-17
5.8.3 TRIM-1 Mechanical _________________________________________ 5-18
5.9 PEH-EFA ______________________________________________________ 5-19
5.10 Logging Equipment Heads ____________________________________ 5-20
5.10.1 FIT-1 Mechanical ___________________________________________ 5-20
5.10.2 FIT-2 Electrical _____________________________________________ 5-22
5.10.3 FIT-3 Operational ___________________________________________ 5-24
5.10.4 TRIM-1 Mechanical _________________________________________ 5-24
5.10.5 Calibration __________________________________________________ 5-25
5.10.5.1 LEH-HT, LEH-MT, and LEH-QT Shop Calibration Procedure 5-26
5.10.5.2 LEH-PT Shop Calibration Procedure ______________________ 5-31
5.10.5.3 LEH-ST Shop Calibration Procedure ______________________ 5-34
Private
5-1 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Maintenance 5-1
Maintenance
5.1 General Information

Table 5-1: Head Maintenance Frequencies
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Frequency Equipment Type
Type Type Name Work
After every
FIT-1 job and after
Fast Inspection Post operational
and severe transport, All heads
of Tool checks
FIT-2 or a handling
accident
More extreme
checks and parts Monthly or 6
replacements jobs whichever All heads
(O-ring, Boot comes first
etc.)
Logging
TRIM-1 Wet loadcell Equipment Head
Tool Review Monthly
calibration with a loadcell
and and Inspection
TRIM-2 Monthly Monthly or 6
jobs which ever
comes first or
Weakpoint any condition Solid or Flexible
replacement as described Weakpoint
in Section 8.6,
Weakpoint
Maintenance.
When performing explosive severing/cutting operations a new flexible weakpoint

must be installed in the head prior to running in hole. The flexible weakpoint
must be replaced after one (1) severing/cutting job.
Quality Note
All flexible weakpoints subjected to one (1) explosive severing/cutting job must
be junked.
The head maintenance frequencies are designed for times when the tool has
been on normal jobs within the head specification. However, if any special
conditions as listed in the table are encountered, TRIM-1 of all heads should
occur after every job.
Private
The maintenance procedures for each head groups are described in Sections
5.4 to 5.7. Before going to the detailed maintenance procedure, Section 5.1
O-Ring Practices, 5.2 Lubrication Guidelines and 5.3 Worn parts Replacement
Guidelines should be understood.
PEH-L, adaptor heads and ECRD are not covered in this section. For the
maintenance procedure, refer to the documents in Table 5-3.
Table 5-2: Reference Documents for PEH-L, Adaptor Heads and ECRD
Asset Name Reference Documents

FPIT-D Maintenance Manual (InTouch
PEH-L
# 3016135)
Adapters Repair and Maintenance Manual
Adaptor Heads
(InTouch # 3016829)
ECRD-E/F Operations and Maintenance
ECRD
Manual (InTouch # 4324935)
5.2 O-ring Practices

O-rings are vital to the successful operation of all Schlumberger tools.
Schlumberger uses O-rings in every downhole tool. Proper maintenance of
O-rings and the grooves they fit in is vital to the integrity of the seal. Missing
O-rings are a cause of many downhole failures; usually resulting in lost time
failures and damaged equipment.
An O-ring seals pressure by plugging a small gap through which fluid can pass
if the O-ring were not there. See the figure below. The fluid pressure pushes
the O-ring material into the gap, plugging it and gaining an effective seal. As
the pressure increases on the fluid side of the O-ring, the O-ring deforms and
moves further into the gap. If the pressure and temperature limits of the O-ring
are exceeded, extrusion failure occurs. The result is a flooded tool. This is one
good reason to never substitute O-rings.
Quality Note
Never substitute O-rings with O-rings that have a different part number, even
when they are the same size. Always use the exact O-ring part number that is
called for in the tool assembly drawing.
Private
HCS Sustaining Engineering\Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo\InTouch Content ID 3012542\4.0\Release Date:23-Mar-2018\EDMS UID: 275261732\Produced: 23-Mar-2018 04:07:36 5-3 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Maintenance 5-3
Figure 5-1: O-ring position (from Parker O-ring Handbook)
5.3 Lubrication Guidelines

Lubrication is very important to the proper maintenance of heads. There
are 6 lubricants commonly available as described in the sub section. The
recommended grease for the heads are listed in Table 5-4.
Quality Note
Read this MSDS before handling or disposing of the lubricants.
Private
Table 5-3: Recommended Grease for the Heads
Recommended Grease Up to 400 degF Up to 500 degF

Threads Lubriplate grease (B013366) Mystik JT-6 Hi Temp
or Rutherford Slick-Stuf #4 Multi-purpose grease

anti-galling grease (B022197) (B039178)
O-rings and Backup rings Lubriplate grease (B013366) Krytox GPL-206
grease(B039179)
Inside the head DC-111 (B021698) as a fluid and mud excluder and
anti-stressing of weakpoint when the mud freezes Note : The
use of DC-111 is optional in warm climates and required in cold
climates. In case that the BCC is required to be disconnected
and re-mated, thoroughly clean out all DC-111 from BCC and
feedthroughs
Installing BCCs Small amount of silicone DC-200 Oil (B022152) to aid the BCC
installation
Load cell assembly Silicone DC-200 Oil (B022152)
5.3.1 Lubriplate Grease (B013366)

Lubriplate is general-purpose grease used for a variety of lubricating needs,
including field joint threaded rings, O-rings, and other general purpose uses.
It is a high-temperature grease, but usually is washed out after just a few trips
downhole. Lubricate threaded rings on both sides, after every job, while breaking
down the tool. Use it on O-ring installation tools in order to slide the O-ring into
place. Use it on O-rings to help the mating part slide on without damaging the
O-ring. It can be used up to 400 degF (204 degC).
5.3.2 Rutherford Slick-Stuf #4 Grease (B022197)

Rutherford grease effectively prevents galling of threads and prevents freezing
of shop joints with dried mud. Its use with shop joints is important since these
joints are unscrewed less often than field joints. Rutherford contains small Teflon
particles, which help its anti-galling features. If you are having trouble with
threads galling, lubricate with "Rutherford Red" and see if the galling goes away.
If it fails to go away, submit a sustaining request.
Private
5.3.3 Mystik JT-6 Hi Temp Multi-purpose Grease

(B039178)
Mystik JT-6 High Performance Marine Grease is a red color smooth but tacky
grease with outstanding water resistance. It is designed to provide excellent
lubrication for greased chassis points and other wet-environment applications
with the following features. It can be used in the applications with the temperature
from 400 to 500 degF (204 to 260 degC).
• Water insoluble, excellent water resistance
• Rust, corrosion and wear protection
• Extreme Pressure (EP), shock load and fretting wear (vibration) protection
• Compatible with commonly used lithium, lithium complex and calcium based
greases
5.3.4 Krytox GPL-206 Grease (B039179)

Krytox GPL-206 grease are white fluorinated synthetic greases that are non
reactive, non flammable, safe in chemical and oxygen services, and are long
lasting. It is rated to 500 degF (260 degC) and can be used on the O-rings
and backup rings in the head. Heating above 500 degF (260 degC) may form
potentially toxic fluorine compounds.
5.3.5 DC-111 (B-021698)

DC-111 is used mainly as a fluid and mud excluder. Heads are packed with
DC-111 to keep them from filling with mud. This prevents damage that mud
can do when left in a head, such as corrosion, freezing and stressing of the
weakpoint, freezing moving parts, etc. Since mud causes many problems, its
elimination is important. DC-111 is quite good at excluding mud and remaining
in place.
However, DC-111 has its drawbacks. DC-111 can cause galling on threaded
parts, and it makes BCC sealing less effective. Always make up BCC
connections dry, and only pack them with DC-111 if called out in the instructions.
The DC-111 may be cleaned off the BCC and feedthroughs, using degreaser
(B033239) that is available in a spray can. Many locations in warmer climates

have elected to avoid the DC-111 packing, instead preferring to washout the
head after each job. In cold climates; however, it is necessary to pack the head
with DC-111 to avoid stressing s when the mud freezes.
Private
5.3.6 Silicone DC-200 Oil (B022152)

Silicon DC-200 is not grease, but instead an insulating, inert silicone oil. Silicon
oil is primarily used for oil-baths, especially in electrical applications since it is a
good insulator. Silicon oil is used in both the oil-filled (LEH-QO) and the tension
heads (LEH-QT). In the LEH-QO, DC-200 provides an insulating environment
(oil-bath) around the booted feedthrough. In the LEH-QT, DC-200 provides an
oil-bath for the tension sensor.
5.4 Worn Parts Replacement Guidelines
Note
When replacing spirol pins, groove pins, screws and other commercial item
parts, always use the SWS B-number part called out in the assembly drawing.
Never substitute a fastener with another part, either a Schlumberger part with a
different number or a locally purchased part.
5.4.1 Pins
Pins are vital components in heads. If pins are called for on the print, USE THEM.
Make sure they are installed before going downhole. They are there for good
a reason. Most often, in heads, pins prevent backoff of threaded parts. If the
threaded parts backoff downhole, you have trouble, sometimes serious trouble.
Do not substitute pins. Use exactly the pin called for by part number on the
assembly print. The pin should fit the hole tightly, requiring the firm use of a
hammer and the correct size punch. If the pin slides in easily, it will fall out easily
too. This indicates the part is worn and must be replaced. To maximize the life
of parts that use pins, make sure you use the correct pin and use a punch that
matches the pin diameter to install and remove the pin.
5.4.2 Groove Pins

Some heads use groove pins instead of spirol pins. The groove pin normally has
better pin retention and higher shear strength than a spirol pin. Groove pins are
solid and have several grooves running axially along the pin. These pins have a
slight taper, so one end is smaller than the other. Insert the groove pin small end
first, and remove it by reversing it out in the opposite direction. This keeps the
mating part from being "wallowed out" and having a loose fit.
Private
Note
Never substitute a spirol pin for a groove pin.
5.4.3 Screws
Damaged and worn screws cause equipment failures and head damage. Make
sure that screw threads are clean and not worn. It takes only a small burr to
cause problems when installing screws. Check that the screw head or hex socket
head is not worn. If it is, replace it. Again, you must use only the exact part called
for on the print. Do not go to the local hardware store to replace screws. Use
only the B# part called for on the print. The screws have been specially selected
by the designer for their material, strength, and other special characteristics of
which you may not be aware. The parts from the local hardware store may be
made of inferior material, or may not match requirements of the design. Replace
SWS parts only with the appropriate SWS part.
Screws must be made up with the proper torque level. If too loose, the part
backs off. If too tight, the screw threads may strip and fail. With hex socket
wrenches, the screw should be tightened to the point that when loosened a
notable "CLACK" is heard. Use a torque wrench whenever a makeup torque is
specified on the assembly drawing.
5.4.4 Threaded Parts

Thread a new screw into any threaded hole that feels or looks worn. If the new
screw is not sufficiently tight, the part is worn and must be replaced. If in doubt,
check the tightness on a newer tool and compare the two. The threaded part
will wear eventually, since many screws have been run in and out of it. A part or
screw that is found loose after running in the well probably indicates the screw or
threaded hole is worn (assuming it was tight when you went in the hole). Do not
ignore this symptom; replace the worn part before placing the head in service.
Private
5.5 Monocable Heads

5.5.1 FIT-1 Mechanical

Table 5-4: FIT-1 Mechanical – MH-22, MH-32
No Action Head Type

1 Wash the head clean to remove the mud while pulling out of hole in the last MH-22,
descent. MH-32
2 Apply a light coat of oil on all parts to minimize rusting. The surfaces are treated MH-22,
to absorb this oil. MH-32
3 Clean and lubricate the thread with Lubriplate grease (B013366) immediately after MH-22,
each job unless specified in Section 3 and Section 4. MH-32
4 Inspect the contact (pin or socket) at the lower head and replace them whenever MH-22,
bent or pushed-in contacts are found. Ensure that contacts are clean. MH-32
5 Remove the bell housing off as described in Disassembly section. MH-22,
MH-32
6 Inspect the armor strands at the rope socket for corrosion or pitting. If found, MH-22,
rebuild the rope socket. MH-32
7 Inspect the conductor (including grounding wire) and connection for continuity and MH-22,
tightness. If any damage is found, replace the wire. MH-32
8 Visually inspect the BCC for any damage or wear. If any damage is found, rebuild
MH-22,
the BCC. If BCCs are disconnected, all surfaces MUST be thoroughly cleaned
MH-32
before the connection is made up again as per step 9 below.
9 In case that the BCC is required to be disconnected and re-mated, thoroughly
clean out all DC-111 from BCC and feedthroughs.
1. Clean the connector by spraying HCFC spray cleaner (B033239) into the
socket side.
2. Let the liquid accumulate and stir with a brush. MH-22,
MH-32
3. Dump the fluid and rinse the connector by spraying more solvent up into the
socket.
4. Spray the mating boot/pin and wipe quickly if needed. This solvent evaporates
rapidly chilling the part. Condensation of moisture may occur in humid areas.
10 Replace O-rings when:
• O-ring was exposed outside specifications. MH-22,
MH-32
• A defect is found
11 Inspect the fishing bell for burrs or nicks that can cause damage to the cable armor. MH-22,
MH-32
12 Inspect the spirol pins and screws. If any bent or worn pins are found, replace MH-22,
them. MH-32
13 Inspect all spirol pin holes. If the new spiral pin becomes loose in the spiral pin MH-22,
holes, the hole became worn out. Discard it order a new part. MH-32
Private
No Action Head Type

14 Install the bell housing back as described in Assembly section. MH-22,
MH-32
15 Pump the head with DC-111 using the grease fitting if required both in the torpedo
MH-22,
and the feedthrough connection after each descent. If this is not possible, pump
MH-32
it after every job.
16 Clean and lubricate the thread protector with Lubriplate grease (B013366) and MH-22,
install it in the head. MH-32
5.5.2 FIT-2 Electrical

Table 5-5: FIT-2 Electrical – MH-22, MH-32
No. Action Meter Head

Type
1 Continuity Check Calibrated Simpson MH-22,
Measure and record the continuity of the conductor multimeter (or MH-32
line and grounding line. If checking through the head equivalent)
with the logging cable connected, it should be close
to the cable conductor resistance.
2 Insulation Resistance Check Calibrated analog MH-22,
Measure and record the insulation resistance Megger meter MH-32,
between the conductor line and Mass. The result
should be 500 Mohms or greater at 500VDC.
If a problem is found, locate the leak and replace
the parts necessary to eliminate the leak (head lead,
feedthrough, etc.)
If moisture is found under the boot, re-terminate the
fluid-to-air connector using a new boot, liner and
socket.
Quality Note
If an insufficiently greased head has been subjected to freezing conditions, check
the conductors for continuity before running in the hole.
Private
5.5.3 TRIM-1 Mechanical

Table 5-6: TRIM-1 Mechanical – MH-22, MH-32
No. Action Head

Type
1 Wash the head clean to remove the mud while pulling out of hole in the last
descent and proceed to the head workstation.
2 Dissemble the head as described in Section 4.
3 Thoroughly clean all parts.
4 Apply a light coat of oil on all parts to minimize rusting. The surfaces are treated
to absorb this oil.
5 Clean and lubricate the thread with Lubriplate grease (B013366) immediately
after each job unless specified in Section 3 and Section 4.
6 Inspect the contact (pin or socket) at the lower head and replace them whenever
bent or pushed-in contacts are found. Ensure that contacts are clean.
7 Inspect all parts. Replace all worn, damaged, or corroded parts including pins
and screws.
8 Perform a ductility (wrap or torture) test and armor looseness checks as per
TRIM procedures in Wireline Cables (ALC) Operations & Maintenance Manual
(InTouch # 3614996)
9 Rebuild the rope socket. Ensure there is no corrosion or pitting on armor strands
at the rope socket.
10 Rebuild the conductor (including grounding wire). Ensure the good connection
for continuity and tightness.
MH-22,
11 Rebuild BCC as described in 6.3. Ensure that the BCC sealing is clean. MH-32,
12 Replace all O-rings. Check all new O-rings and backup rings (if any) for nicks,
gouges, cuts or tears. Discard any faulty rings. O-ring are listed in the BOM and
drawings. Never use Nitrile B-26xxx O-rings.
13 Lubricated O-rings and seals with Lubriplate grease (B013366) unless specified
in Section 3 and Section 4 before installation
14 Inspect the fishing bell for burrs or nicks that can cause damage to the cable
armor. If it is heavily damaged, discard it and order a new part.
15 Inspect the spirol pins and screws. If any bent or worn pins are found, replace
them.
16 Inspect all spirol pin holes. If the new spiral pin becomes loose in the spiral pin
holes, the hole became worn out. Discard it and order a new part.
17 Re-assemble the head as described in Section 4.
18 Pump the head with DC-111 using the grease fitting if required both in the
torpedo and the feedthrough connection after each descent. If this is not
possible, pump it after every job.
19 Clean and lubricate the thread protector with Lubriplate grease (B013366) and
install it in the head.
20 Perform FIT-2 as described in Section 5.4.2.
Private
5.6 PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E


Table 5-7: FIT-1 Mechanical – PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E
No Action Head Type

1 Wash the head clean to remove the mud while pulling out of hole in the last descent. PEK-BB,
PEK-BC,
PEK-E
2 Dissemble PEKs as described in Section 4. PEK-BB,
PEK-BC,
PEK-E
3 Thoroughly clean all parts. PEK-BB,
PEK-BC,
PEK-E
4 Clean out the bore in the intermediate head with wire brush and coat with DC-111 PEK-BB,
prior to installing the molded connector. PEK-BC,
PEK-E
5 Apply a light coat of oil on all parts to minimize rusting. The surfaces are treated PEK-BB,
to absorb this oil. PEK-BC,
PEK-E
6 Clean and lubricate the thread with Lubriplate grease (B013366) immediately after PEK-BB,
each job unless specified in Section 3 and Section 4. PEK-BC,
PEK-E
7 Inspect molded connector (H432190 in PEK-BB and PEK-E, H132562 in PEK-BC) PEK-BB,
and replace if damaged. PEK-BC,
PEK-E
8 Inspect the alignment lug on the intermediate head (H122965 for PEK-BB, H395897 PEK-BB,
in PEK-BC,H123295 in PEK-E) for wear and corrosion. Replace the part if wear or PEK-BC,
corrosion is bad. PEK-E
9 Inspect the contact (pin or socket) at the lower head and replace them whenever PEK-BB,
bent or pushed-in contacts are found. Ensure that contacts are clean. PEK-BC,
PEK-E
10 In case that the BCC is required to be disconnected and re-mated, thoroughly clean
out all DC-111 from BCC and feedthroughs.
1. Clean the connector by spraying HCFC spray cleaner (B033239) into the
socket side.
PEK-BB,
2. Let the liquid accumulate and stir with a brush. PEK-BC,
3. Dump the fluid and rinse the connector by spraying more solvent up into the PEK-E
socket.
4. Spray the mating boot/pin and wipe quickly if needed. This solvent evaporates
rapidly chilling the part. Condensation of moisture may occur in humid areas.
Private
No Action Head Type

11 Inspect all parts. Replace all worn, damaged, or corroded parts including pins and PEK-BB,
screws. PEK-BC,
PEK-E
12 Replace O-rings when: PEK-BB,

• O-ring is exposed outside specifications PEK-BC,
• A defect is found PEK-E
13 Inspect the fishing bell for burrs or nicks that can cause damage to the cable armor. PEK-BB,
PEK-BC,
PEK-E
14 Inspect the spirol pins and screws. If any bent or worn pins are found, replace them. PEK-BB,
Replace the set screws (H134123 in PEK-BB and PEK-E) often. The Allen head PEK-BC,
on this screw will strip easily. PEK-E
15 Inspect all spirol pin holes. If the new spiral pin becomes loose in the spiral pin PEK-BB,
holes, the hole became worn out. Discard it order a new part. PEK-BC,
PEK-E
16 Re-assemble the head as described in Section 4. PEK-BB,
PEK-BC,
PEK-E
17 Pump the head with DC-111 using the grease fitting if required both in the torpedo PEK-BB,
and the feedthrough connection after each descent. If this is not possible, pump PEK-BC,
it after every job. PEK-E
18 Clean and lubricate the thread protector with Lubriplate grease (B013366) and PEK-BB,
install it in the head. PEK-BC,
PEK-E

Table 5-8: FIT-2 Electrical – PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E
No. Action Meter Head

Type
1 Continuity Check Calibrated Simpson
Measure and record the continuity of the conductor multimeter (or
line. It should be < 1.0 ohm. equivalent)
2 Insulation Resistance Check Calibrated analog

Measure and record the insulation resistance between Megger meter
the conductor line and Mass. The result should be 500 PEK-BB,
Mohms or greater at 500VDC. PEK-BC,
PEK-E
If a problem is found, locate the leak and replace
the parts necessary to eliminate the leak (head lead,
feedthrough, etc.)
If moisture is found under the boot, re-terminate the
fluid-to-air connector using a new boot, liner and
socket.
Private
Quality Note
Private

Table 5-9: TRIM-1 Mechanical – PEK-BB, PEK-BC, PEK-E
No Action Head Type

1 Wash the head clean to remove the mud while pulling out of hole in the last
descent and proceed to the head workstation.
2 Dissemble PEKs as described in Section 4.
4 Clean out the bore in the intermediate head with wire brush and coat with
DC-111 prior to installing the molded connector.
5 Apply a light coat of oil on all parts to minimize rusting. The surfaces are
treated to absorb this oil.
6 Clean and lubricate the thread with Lubriplate grease (B013366) immediately
after each job unless specified in Section 3 and Section 4.
7 Inspect the molded connector (H432190 in PEK-BB and PEK-E, H132562 in
PEK-BC) and replace if if any damage is found.
8 Inspect the alignment lug on the intermediate head (H122965 for PEK-BB,
H395897 in PEK-BC,H123295 in PEK-E) for wear and corrosion. Replace
it if any wear or corrosion is found.
9 Inspect the contact (pin or socket) at the lower head and replace them if any
bent or pushed-in contacts are found. Ensure that contacts are clean.
10 Inspect all parts. Replace all worn, damaged, or corroded parts including PEK-BB,
pins and screws. PEK-BC,
PEK-E
11 Replace all O-rings. Check all new O-rings and backup rings (if any) for
nicks, gouges, cuts or tears. Discard any faulty rings. O-ring are listed in the
BOM and drawings. Never use Nitrile B-26xxx O-rings.
12 Lubricated O-rings and seals with Lubriplate grease (B013366) unless
specified in Section 3 and Section 4 before installation.
13 Inspect the fishing bell for burrs or nicks that can cause damage to the cable
armor. If it is heavily damaged, discard it and order a new part.
14 Inspect the spirol pins and screws. Replace them If any bent or worn pins
are found. Replace the set screws (H134123 in PEK-BB and PEK-E) often.
The Allen head on this screw will strip easily.
15 Inspect all spirol pin holes. If the new spiral pin becomes loose in the spiral
pin holes, the hole became worn out. Discard it order a new part.
17 Pump the head with DC-111 using the grease fitting. DC-111 should be kept
full at all times to prevent entrapment of water.
18 Clean and lubricate the thread protector with Lubriplate grease (B013366)
and install it in the head.
Private
5.7 PEK-BD, PEK-BE, PEK-F

Refer to the following inTouch links for FIT and TRIM of the PEK-BD, PEK-BE,
and PEK-F.
PEK-BD Maintenance SWI - FIT InTouch 6346022

PEK-BD Maintenance SWI - TRIM InTouch 6346023
PEK-BE Maintenance SWI - FIT InTouch 6346025

PEK-BE Maintenance SWI - TRIM InTouch 6346026
PEK-F Maintenance SWI - FIT InTouch 6314702

PEK-F Maintenance SWI - TRIM InTouch 6314703
5.8 Perforating Equipment Heads

Table 5-10: FIT-1 Mechanical – PEH-AB, PEH-E, PEH-KD
No. Action Head Type

Wash the head clean to remove the mud while pulling out of hole in the PEH-AB,
1 last descent. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Apply a light coat of oil on all parts to minimize rusting. The surfaces are PEH-AB,
2 treated to absorb this oil. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Clean and lubricate the thread with Lubriplate grease (B013366) PEH-AB,
3 immediately after each job unless specified in Section 3 and Section 4. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Inspect the contact (pin or socket) at the lower head and replace them if PEH-AB,
4 any bent or pushed-in contacts are found. Ensure that contacts are clean. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Inspect the armor strands at the rope socket for corrosion or pitting. If PEH-AB,
5 found, rebuild the rope socket. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Inspect the conductor (including grounding wire) and connection for PEH-AB,
6 continuity and tightness. Replace it if any damage is found. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Visually inspect the BCC for any damage or wear. If any damage is
PEH-AB,
found, rebuild the BCC. If BCCs are disconnected, all surfaces MUST be
7 PEH-E,
thoroughly cleaned before the connection is made up again as per step
PEH-KD
8 below.
Private

In case that the BCC is required to be disconnected and re-mated,
thoroughly clean out all DC-111 from BCC and feedthroughs as below.
1. Clean the connector by spraying HCFC spray cleaner (B033239) into
the socket side.

2. Let the liquid accumulate and stir with a brush. PEH-AB,
8 PEH-E,
3. Dump the fluid and rinse the connector by spraying more solvent up PEH-KD
into the socket.
4. Spray the mating boot/pin and wipe quickly if needed. This solvent
evaporates rapidly chilling the part. Condensation of moisture may
occur in humid areas.
Replace O-rings when: PEH-AB,
9 • O-ring is exposed outside specifications. PEH-E,
• A defect is found PEH-KD
Inspect the fishing bell for burrs or nicks that can cause damage to the PEH-AB,
10 cable armor. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Inspect the spirol pins and screws replace them if any bent or worn pins PEH-AB,
11 are found. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Inspect all spirol pin holes. If the new spiral pin becomes loose in the spiral PEH-AB,
12 pin holes, the hole became worn out. Discard it order a new part. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Pump the head with DC-111 using the grease fitting if required both in the PEH-AB,
13 torpedo and the feedthrough connection after each descent. If this is not PEH-E,
possible, pump it after every job. PEH-KD
Clean and lubricate the thread protector with Lubriplate grease (B013366) PEH-AB,
14 and install it in the head. PEH-E,
PEH-KD
Private

Table 5-11: FIT-2 Electrical – PEH-AB, PEH-E, PEH-KD
No. Action Meter Head Type

Continuity Check
Measure and record the continuity of
the conductor line and grounding line. If
1 checking through the head only, it should PEH-AB, PEH-E
be < 1.0 ohm. If checking through the
head with the logging cable connected, it
should be close to the cable conductor
resistance.
Continuity Check
Measure and record the continuity of
following lines from the female BCC to
the pin in the lower head. Calibrated Simpson
• From Line 1 to Line 11 multimeter (or
equivalent)
• From Line 2 to Line 15
2 • From Line 4 to Line 12 PEH-KD

• From Line 10 to Mass
If checking through the head only, it
should be < 1.0 ohm.
Insulation Resistance Check
Measure and record the insulation
resistance between the conductor line
and Mass. The result should be 500
Mohms or greater at 500 VDC.
Calibrated analog PEH-AB, PEH-E,
3 If a problem is found, locate the leak and Megger meter set PEH-KD
replace the parts necessary to eliminate
the leak (head lead, feedthrough, etc.)
If moisture is found under the boot,
re-terminate the fluid-to-air connector
using a new boot, liner and socket.
Quality Note
Private

Table 5-12: TRIM-1 Mechanical – PEH-AB, PEH-E, PEH-K

1 Wash the head clean to remove the mud while pulling out of hole in the PEH-AB,
last descent and proceed to the head workstation. PEH-E,
2 Dissemble the head as described in Section 4. PEH-KD
3 Do not attempt to unscrew the bell housing until you have followed the
instructions under the Disassembly section. Any attempt to unscrew the
PEH-AB
bell housing could result in sheared conductor wires and/or damage to
the weakpoint and rope socket.
Private

5 Apply a light coat of oil on all parts to minimize rusting. The surfaces are
treated to absorb this oil.

6 Clean and lubricate the thread with Lubriplate grease (B013366)
immediately after each job unless specified in Section 3 and Section 4.
7 Inspect the contact (pin or socket) at the lower head and replace them
if any bent or pushed-in contacts are found. Ensure that contacts are
clean.
8 Inspect all parts. Replace all worn, damaged, or corroded parts
including pins and screws.
9 Rebuild the conductor (including grounding wire). Ensure the good
connection for continuity and tightness.
10 Rebuild BCC as described in 6.3. Ensure that the BCC sealing is clean.
11 Replace all O-rings. Check all new O-rings and backup rings (if any) for
nicks, gouges, cuts or tears. Discard any faulty rings. O-ring are listed
in the BOM and drawings. Never use Nitrile B-26xxx O-rings.
PEH-AB,
12 Lubricated O-rings and seals with Lubriplate grease (B013366) unless PEH-E,
specified in Section 3 and Section 4 before installation. PEH-KD
13 Inspect and replace the weakpoint as described in Section 8.
14 Inspect the fishing bell for burrs or nicks that can cause damage to the
cable armor. If it is heavily damaged, discard it and order a new part.
15 Inspect the spirol pins and screws. Replace them If any bent or worn
pins are found.
16 Inspect all spirol pin holes. If the new spiral pin becomes loose in the
spiral pin holes, the hole became worn out. Discard it and order a new
part.
18 Pump the head with DC-111 using the grease fitting if required both in
the torpedo and the feedthrough connection after each descent. If this
is not possible, pump it after every job.
19 Clean and lubricate the thread protector with Lubriplate grease
(B013366) and install it in the head.
5.9 PEH-EFA
Refer to the following inTouch links for FIT and SLS-1 of the PEH-EFA.
PEH-EFA Maintenance SWI - FIT InTouch 6346027

PEH-EFA Maintenance SWI - SLS-1 InTouch 6346028
Private
5.10 Logging Equipment Heads

For maintenance of the LEH-QT and LEH-ST, refer to the Heads SWI Reference
Page (InTouch 6541641).

Table 5-13: FIT-1 Mechanical – LEHs

1 Wash the head clean to remove the mud while pulling out of hole All heads
in the last descent.
2 Wash the mud from out of the spring area, using the window LEH-QO
provided. This is very important, or the spring may freeze up with
dried mud.
3 Clean and lubricate the thread with Lubriplate grease (B013366) All heads
immediately after each job unless specified in Section 3 and Section
4.
4 Inspect the contact (pin or socket) at the lower head and replace All heads
them whenever bent or pushed-in contacts are found. Ensure that
contacts are clean.
5 Visually inspect the BCC for any damage or wear. If any damage All heads
is found, rebuild the BCC. If BCCs are disconnected, all surfaces
MUST be thoroughly cleaned before the connection is made up
again as per step 6 below.
6 In case that the BCC is required to be disconnected and re-mated, All heads
thoroughly clean out all DC-111 from BCC and feedthroughs.
1. Clean the connector by spraying HCFC spray cleaner (B033239)
into the socket side.
2. Let the liquid accumulate and stir with a brush.
3. Dump the fluid and rinse the connector by spraying more solvent
up into the socket.
4. Spray the mating boot/pin and wipe quickly if needed. This
solvent evaporates rapidly chilling the part. Condensation of
moisture may occur in humid areas.
7 Replace O-rings when: All heads
• O-ring is exposed outside specifications.
• A defect is found
8 Check the load cell for oil leaks, or other damage. LEH with a wet
loadcell (LEH-HT,
MT, PT)
Private

9 Keep a good coat of DC-111 silicone grease between the outer LEH with a wet
housing loadcell (LEH-HT,
MT, PT) and
(H701907) and the fishing bell extension (H701908) to provide for

a smooth transmission of load to the weakpoint and the loadcell. A LEH-AA/LEH-RC
grease port is located on the OD of the fishing bell extension for
this. Do not allow the interface between these two parts to become
frozen with mud.
10 Visually check the oil-level, in the window provided. If oil level is LEH-QO
low, but the head shows no leaks, drain oil and check for mud
contamination. If the oil is contaminated, re-build the head, using all
new seals and head leads. If the oil is clean, re-fill the oil-chamber,
making sure the piston is in the correct oil-fill position.
11 Check the tightness of the piston rod (H701475). It will loosen slightly LEH-QO
as the elastomer packoff takes a compression set, which is normal.
Re-torque the piston rod, if necessary.
12 Check the locking screw (B013519). It holds the thermometer LEH-PT
housing lock ring.
Verify it is not loose or worn out. If necessary, replace the locking
screw and use Loctite 242 (B030472) on the threads, especially
during case hole operations.
13 Inspect the fishing bell for burrs or nicks that can cause damage All heads
to the cable armor.
14 Inspect the spirol pins and screws. If any bent or worn pins are All heads
found, replace them.
15 Inspect all spirol pin holes. If the new spiral pin becomes loose All heads
in the spiral pin holes, the hole became worn out. Discard it order
a new part.
16 Pump the head with DC-111 using the grease fitting if required both All heads
in the torpedo and the feedthrough connection after each descent. If
this is not possible, pump it after every job.
17 Clean and lubricate the thread protector with Lubriplate grease All heads
(B013366) and install it in the head.
Private

Table 5-14: FIT-2 Electrical – LEHs
No Action Meter Head Type

1 Loadcell Continuity Resistance Check LEH with
Measure and record the resistance of following lines. a loadcell
(LEH-HT,
• From Pin 14 to Pin 19 (signal legs) MT, PT)
• From Pin 15 to Pin 20 (power legs)
The result should be stable from month to month and read
as below.
• Dry load cell : The result should be 350 ±10 ohms on
the signal leg, and 350 ±50 ohms on the power leg.
• Wet load cell : The result should be 1000 (±10%) Calibrated
ohms on the signal leg and about 140 higher on the Simpson
power leg. multimeter
Measure and record the bridge continuity resistance from (or
Pin 14 to Mass. The test result should be 40M ohms or equivalent)
greater.

Hazard Category: Machinery equipment
hand tools
Do not use a megger when checking bridge resistance to

mass.
2 Continuity Check of Line 28 and Line 29 Calibrated LEH-HT,

Check the resistance between pins 28 and 29. The Simpson MT, PT, QC,
resistance should be < 1.0 ohm. multimeter QE, QO, RC
(or
equivalent)
3 Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) Resistance Check Calibrated LEH-AA
Check the resistance of following lines. Simpson
multimeter
• From Pin 18 to Pin 17 (power legs) (or
• From Pin 22 to Pin 7(signal legs) equivalent)
The result should be 110 +/- 1 ohms at 76 degF.
4 Mud Temperature Sensor (RTD) Resistance Check Calibrated LEH-MT, PT
Check continuity resistance of following lines. Simpson
multimeter
• From Pin 12 to Pin 31(power legs) (or
• From Pin 13 to Pin 30 (signal legs) equivalent)
The result should be 110 +/- 1 ohms at 76 degF.
Private
No Action Meter Head Type

5 Continuity Check Calibrated All heads
Measure and record the continuity resistance of each Simpson (except
multimeter LEH-AA)
conductor through the head.

(or
• Lines 1 to 7 and 10 for LEH-MT,PT equivalent)
• Lines 1 to 10 for LEH-HT,ST,QT,RC, QE,QC
If checking through the head only, it should be < 1.0
ohm. If checking through the head with the logging cable
connected, it should be close to the cable conductor
resistance.
6 Continuity Check Calibrated LEH-MT, PT
Measure and record the continuity resistance from Line 8 Simpson
to 10, Line 9 to 26. If checking through the head only, it multimeter
should be < 1.0 ohm. (or
equivalent)
7 Insulation Resistance Check Calibrated All heads
Measure and record the insulation resistance between each analog
conductor and Mass. The result should be 500 Mohms or Megger
greater at 500VDC. meter

Hazard Category: Machinery equipment
hand tools
Do not use megger on load cell lines and on RTD lines as

shown below.
LEH’s containing load cells - Load Cell Lines (LH 14, 15,
16, 19, 20 )
LEH-MT/PT – RTD Lines (LH 12, 13, 30 and 31)
LEH-AA – RTD Lines (7, 17, 18, 22)
Use 31-pin extender (H245349) which prevents access to
load cell pins for the head with 31 pins.
Quality Note
Private
5.10.3 FIT-3 Operational

Table 5-15: FIT-3 Operational – LEHs

1 Connect the tool as per the logging program and power up All heads
the tool.
2 Select the proper tool string in LES. All heads
3 Enter the DF Gain obtained from master calibration. LEH with a loadcell
(LEH-HT, MT, and PT)
with OP
4 With no load applied to the load cell, enter the negative value LEH with a loadcell
of the DF displayed on the IO Monitor as the DF offset. (LEH-HT, MT, and PT)
with OP
5 Go to the log phase and run the simulation log. All heads
6 With the tool horizontal, monitor the CDF (Calibrated LEH with a loadcell
Downhole Force) with OP and HTEN (Head Tension) with (LEH-HT, MT, and PT)
Maxwell. It should be increased from 0 ±100 lbf when pulling
on the cable just above the head.
7 With the tool vertical in air, monitor the CDF with OP and LEH with a loadcell
HTEN with Maxwell. It should read the tool string weight in air. (LEH-HT, MT, and PT)
8 Monitor MTEM (Mud Temperature) and verify proper LEH with mud
operation of mud temperature transducer. temperature sensor
(LEH-AA, MT, PT)
9 Verify proper operation of all other tools in the string. All heads

Table 5-16: TRIM-1 Mechanical – LEHs

1 Wash the head clean to remove the mud and proceed to the head All heads
workstation.
2 Dissemble the head as described in Section 4. All heads
3 Thoroughly clean all parts. All heads
4 Clean and lubricate the thread with Lubriplate grease (B013366) All heads
immediately after each job unless specified in Section 3 and
Section 4.
5 Inspect the contact (pin or socket) at the lower head and replace All heads
them whenever bent or pushed-in contacts are found. Ensure that
contacts are clean.
6 Inspect all parts. Replace all worn, damaged, or corroded parts All heads
including pins and screws.
Private

7 Rebuild BCC as described in 6.3. Ensure that the BCC sealing All heads
is clean.
8 Replace all O-rings. Check all new O-rings and backup rings (if All heads
any) for nicks, gouges, cuts or tears. Discard any faulty rings.
O-rings are listed in the BOM and drawings. Never use Nitrile
B-26xxx O-rings.
9 Replace the O-rings on the 5 pin feedthrough (H701893). Pull LEH with a wet
the 5-pin bulkhead from the wet loadcell using a 4-40 screw) and loadcell (LEH-HT,
replace its O-rings. Retainer ring (H701312) must first be removed MT, PT)
using modified socket (H701459). To avoid putting an air bubble
in the oil, top off the loadcell with silicone oil, then re-install the
re-dressed bulkhead. Bleed off this excess oil at one of the upper
oil-fill plugs.
10 Inspect and replace the weakpoint as described in Section 8. All heads
11 Remove the two 8-32 X 1/2 in socket head set screws (B012267) All heads
from the RTD cover plate (H360195). Replace O-ring, B038861,
and back-up ring, T5011464.
12 Clean out any moisture or debris from the cavity in the lower head LEH-MT
that exposes the mud temperature transducer.
13 Replace the locking screw (B013519). It holds the thermometer LEH-AA, MT, PT
housing lock ring, Use loctite 242 (B030472) on the threads.
14 Make sure that loadcell retaining ring is secured with loctite 242 LEH with a loadcell
(B030472) and torqued to its specified value on the assembly (LEH-HT, MT, PT)
drawing.
15 Inspect the fishing bell for burrs or nicks that can cause damage LEH-QO
to the cable armor. If it is heavily damaged, discard it and order
a new part.
16 Inspect the spirol pins and screws. Replace them If any bent or All heads
worn pins are found.
17 Inspect all spirol pin holes. If the new spiral pin becomes loose All heads
in the spiral pin holes, the hole became worn out. Discard it and
order a new part.
18 Re-assemble the head as described in Section 4. All heads
19 Perform FIT-2 as described in Section 5.7.2. All heads
5.10.5 Calibration
Logging equipment heads with a load cell require the periodical shop calibration.
Calibrate the head with a loadcell as instructed below. OP does not support
calibration task while Maxwell supports Head Tension Master and Before Logging
Surface calibrations. In OP, record GAIN for input into the logging software
before logging and update the RITE.net.
Private
5.10.5.1 LEH-HT, LEH-MT, and LEH-QT Shop Calibration Procedure

The purpose of the calibration is to obtain the “gain” and “offset” for the loadcell.
The GAIN numbers have been shown to be remarkably stable during the field
test of the LEH-QT, so there is some question as to whether a shop cal is
necessary. If you want to check the response of your LEH-QT, do a shop cal. If
you want to do a real calibration, and use the GAIN generated by the calibration,
use the digital tension calibrator, TDC-C.
The LEH-QT is calibrated on the new digital calibrator, TDC-C, the same
calibrator that is used for the CMTD and TD-K. One additional adapter is
required, in additional to a special 31-pin jumper cable. All necessary parts
(except the TDC-C) are included in the LEH-QT shop kit (H701900). The
following items are required to perform the shop calibration. See the “Shop
Calibration Equipment” table below.
Table 5-17: Shop Calibration Equipment
Part #Qty Description
H713140 1 TDC-C
H352097 1 Lower Adapter, TDC
H701457 1 Clevis
B033499 1 Pin, Detent, 3/4 in. Dia.
H713121 1 31 Pin Test Jumper
B033776 1 7/16-20, 2.5-in long, STL, Zinc Plated Bolt
B033777 6 washers, 3.8-in. zinc plated
1 DTC-A or TCC-B modified
1 Maxis or CSU-D
1 OP16 or higher
If your location has a TDC-A (calibrator for TD-K), you must order the TDC-A
to TDC-B Conversion Kit (H441324) AND a TDC-B to a TDC-C conversion kit
(H713131) or you may order a complete TDC-C assembly (H713140) which
includes the TDC-C plus all adapters required to calibrate a CMTD.
Remove the fishing neck, torpedo, weakpoint assembly, and 2-3/4 in to 3-3/8
in adapter from the head. Looking up should be the loadcell, (still mounted in
the head) with head leads dangling. Secure the head leads so they do not get
damaged during the calibration. Screw the 7/16-20 bolt (with washers installed)
into the top of the loadcell. Engage at least 1/2-in of thread.
Private
Connect the 31-pin jumper, H713121 to the LEH-QT.

Note
Jumper cable (H713121) must be used to calibrate. Do not use any old 31-pin
jumper.
Run the other end of the 31-pin jumper through the lower adapter. Screw the
lower adapter onto the LEH-QT. Pin the clevis (H701457) onto the bottom of the
lower adapter (H352097) using pin (B033499).
Install the LEH-QT assembly into the base of the TDC-B by pinning the clevis to
the TDC frame, using the large pin that is part of the TDC-B. Install the upper
rope socket support onto the tensile rod leading from the dial indicator or digital
tension calibrator. Place the bolt at the top end of the loadcell in the upper rope
socket support, with the washers inside the rope socket support to carry the load.
Connect the other end of the 31-pin jumper into the UH of the DTC or modified
TCC-B. Fire up the Maxis and get the I/O monitor on display. SET THE GAIN =
1.0. SET THE OFFSET = 0.0 in the DTC-A Tool Signals table. If you fail to do
this step, your calibration will be off.
Private
Figure 5-2: LEH-QT shop calibration setup
Make sure the calibrated tension rod is at equilibrium temperature. In other

words, the calibrated tension rod must be temperature stable before using it.
The device is very sensitive to temperature gradients, and if any are present
during calibration, the zero will shift and the calibration will be worthless. Zero
the calibrated tension rod by lightly tapping the dial indicator and adjusting the
dial face to zero the needle.
If you are using the new digital tension calibrator, TDC-C, the load being applied
to the LEH-QT can be read directly from the digital readout meter. No "Calibration
Charts" are necessary. Note that the load is read in K lbs, or thousand pounds,
with two decimal points, so resolution is 10 lbs on the digital system. DO NOT
LOAD THE LEH-QT WITH MORE THAN 8.0K lbs.
Power up the tool and let the transducer warm up for 10-15 minutes. Make sure
there is no tension or compression on the loadcell. If you bleed the hydraulic
pump on the TDC off completely, the upper rope socket support will come to rest
on top of the loadcell, and place a slight compressive force on the loadcell. This
will affect your calibration. Make sure that the hydraulic piston is in a position
such that there is neither tension or compression on the loadcell. Record the
zero-load measurement on the LEH-QT calibration chart, after warm up.
Private
Apply a load of 1,000 lbs to the loadcell, using the hydraulic hand pump.
(Indicator reading should be roughly 0.6). Record the Downhole Force from
the I/O Monitor on the LEH-QT Calibration Chart. Your TDC hydraulics must
not have leaks, and the pump must contain a check valve to prevent bleed-off
of pressure, or you will not get stable readings. Repeat the measurements
in 1,000 lbs. increments until an 8,000 lbs. load is reached, and record that
value. Remove the load (bleed off the pressure) and check to make sure the
zero-reading is within one division of zero. The Maxis Downhole Force should
also have returned to its previous zero-reading, within 25 lbs. Calibrate only in
the direction of increasing tension to minimize the effects of hysteresis. Fill in the
Corrected Maxis DF column by adding the offset to each entry in the previous
column. Figure 5-3 shows an LEH-QT calibration chart correctly filled out.
Once the calibration is complete, you will have to perform some easy calculations
to find the Gain for the LEH-QT.
Gain = 8,000 / corrected Maxis DF @ 8,000 lb. load
Offset = -1 * Maxis DF @ zero tension.
Private
Figure 5-3: LEH-QT Calibration Chart
The LEH-QT can be run without a shop calibration, by plugging in the GAIN
for your specific loadcell, (supplied by HCS) and doing a quick zero-offset
measurement at the wellsite, prior to going in the hole. Be sure there is zero
tension on the weakpoint before making this zero measurement, either by doing
the measurement while horizontal on the catwalk, or by putting in the makeup
plate and setting down the toolstring vertically on the rig floor. Values for GAIN
and OFFSET are then entered into the software, to get accurate tension output
from the LEH-QT.
Private
5.10.5.2 LEH-PT Shop Calibration Procedure

The purpose of the calibration is to get the “gain” and “offset” for the loadcell.
The logging head is calibrated on the TDC-C. The necessary parts (excluding
the TDC-C) are in the LEH-PT shop calibration kit (100520656). The items in
Table 5-18 are required to perform the shop calibration.
Table 5-18: LEH-PT Shop Calibration Equipment
Part Description Qty

TDC-C or TDC-D 1
100268608 Adapter, TDC, LEH-PT 1
H701457 Clevis 1
B033499 Pin, Detent, 3/4 in. Dia. 1
100514576 Cable Cal 31 Pin, LEH-PT 1
B033776 7/16-20, 2.5-in long, STL, Zinc Plated Bolt 1
B033777 washers, 3.8-in. zinc plated 6
QTGC-B telemetry cartridge 1
Maxis running OP software 1
1. Remove the fishing bell, torpedo and weakpoint assembly from the head.
2. Looking up should be the load cell, (still mounted in the head) with head
leads dangling. Secure the head leads so they do not get damaged during
the calibration.
3. Screw the 7/16-20 bolt (with washers installed) into the top of the load cell.
Engage at least 1/2-in of thread.
4. Connect the 31-pin jumper (100514576) to the LEH-PT.
Note
Jumper cable (100514576) must be used for calibration. Do not use the
normal 31-pin jumper (T1037402) since it does not have the proper type of
wires for the load cell lines, inducing noise that will affect the calibration
results.
5. Run the other end of the 31-pin jumper through the TDC adapter.
6. Screw the lower adapter onto the LEH-PT.
7. Pin the clevis (H701457) onto the bottom of the TDC adapter (100268608)
using pin (B033499).
Private
8. Install the LEH-PT assembly into the base of the TDC by pinning the clevis to
the TDC frame, using the large pin that is part of the TDC.
9. Install the upper rope socket support onto the tensile rod leading from the
digital tension calibrator.

10. Place the bolt at the top end of the load cell in the upper rope socket support,
with the washers inside the rope socket support to carry the load.
Quality Note
Do not allow the TDC loadcell to rest on the LEH loadcell. It will place a
compressive force of 30 lbf on the loadcell, altering your zero measurement.
11. Connect the other end of the 31-pin jumper into the UH of the QTGC.
12. Start the Maxis and get the I/O monitor on display.
13. Set the GAIN = 1.0 and set the OFFSET = 0.0 in the QTGC Tool Signals table.
If you fail to do this step, your calibration will be off.
Figure 5-4: LEH-PT shop calibration setup
Do NOT load the LEH-PT with more than 8.0K lbs.

14. Power up the tool and let the transducer warm up for 10-15 minutes.
15. Make sure there is no tension or compression on the loadcell.
If you bleed the hydraulic pump on the TDC off completely, the upper rope
socket support will come to rest on top of the loadcell, and place a slight
compressive force on the loadcell. This will affect your calibration.
Private
16. Make sure that the hydraulic piston is in a position such that there is neither
tension nor compression on the loadcell.
17. Record the zero-load measurement on the LEH calibration chart, after warm
up.
18. Apply a load of 1,000 lbs to the loadcell, using the hydraulic hand pump.
19. Record the Downhole Force from the I/O Monitor on the LEH Calibration
Chart.
20. Repeat the measurements in 1,000 lbs. increments until an 8,000 lbs. load
is reached, and record that value.
21. Remove the load (bleed off the pressure) and check to make sure the
zero-reading is within one division of zero.
The Maxis Downhole Force should also have returned to its previous
zero-reading, within 25 lbs.
22. Calibrate only in the direction of increasing tension to minimize the effects
of hysteresis.
23. Fill in the Corrected Maxis DF column by adding the offset to each entry in
the previous column. Figure 5-5 shows an LEH calibration chart correctly
filled out.
L EH Ca li b r a ti on cha r t
Se t Ga i n t o 1 and Off s e t t o Z e r o be f o r e t ak i ng t he f o r ce m ea s u r e m en t
T DC r ead i n g Max i s DF
0 -70
1000 980
2000 1940
3000 2835
4000 3780
5000 4765
6000 5665
7000 6570
8000 7450
Offset = -1 x Maxis DF @ 0 lbs = +70 lbs
Gain = 8000 / (Maxis DF @ 8000 lbs - Maxis DF @ 0 lbs) = 8000 / (7450 - (-70)) = 1.063
Calibrated By:
Date:
Location:
LEH s/n:
Telemetry cartridge type and s/n:
Figure 5-5: LEH-PT Calibration Chart
24. Once the calibration is complete, you will have to perform some easy
calculations to find the Offset and Gain for the LEH-PT.
Offset = -1 × (Maxis DF @ 0 lbs)
Private
Gain = 8,000 / (Maxis DF @ 8000 lbs – Maxis DF @ 0 lbs).
5.10.5.3 LEH-ST Shop Calibration Procedure

The purpose of the calibration is to obtain the “gain” and “offset “for the loadcell.
The logging head is calibrated on the TDC-C and necessary parts (except for the
TDC-C) are included in the LEH-ST shop calibration kit (100520654). The items
in Table 5-19are required to perform the shop calibration.
Table 5-19: LEH-ST Shop Calibration Equipment
Part Description Qty

TDC-C or TDC-D 1
100508340 Adapter, TDC, LEH-ST 1
H701457 Clevis 1
B033499 Pin, Detent, 3/4-in Dia. 1
100509872 Cable CAL 31 Pin, LEH-ST 1
B033776 7/16-20, 2.5-in long, STL, Zinc Plated Bolt 1
B033777 washers, 3.8-in. zinc plated 6
STGC telemetry cartridge 1
Maxis running OP software 1
1. Remove the fishing bell, torpedo and weakpoint assembly from the head.
2. Looking up should be the load cell, (still mounted in the head) with head
leads dangling. Secure the head leads so they do not get damaged during
the calibration.
3. Screw the 7/16-20 bolt (with washers installed) into the top of the load cell.
Engage at least 1/2-in of thread.
4. Connect the 31-pin jumper (100509872) to the LEH-ST.
Note
Jumper cable (100509872) must be used for calibration. Do not use the
normal 31-pin jumper (H351719) since it does not have the proper type of
wires for the load cell lines, inducing noise that will affect the calibration
results.
5. Run the other end of the 31-pin jumper through the TDC adapter.
6. Screw the lower adapter onto the LEH-ST.
7. Pin the clevis (H701457) onto the bottom of the TDC adapter (100508340)
using pin (B033499).
Private
8. Install the LEH-ST assembly into the base of the TDC by pinning the clevis to
the TDC frame, using the large pin that is part of the TDC.
9. Install the upper rope socket support onto the tensile rod leading from the
digital tension calibrator.

10. Place the bolt at the top end of the load cell in the upper rope socket support,
with the washers inside the rope socket support to carry the load.
Quality Note
Do not allow the TDC loadcell to rest on the LEH loadcell. It will place a
compressive force of 30 lbf on the loadcell, altering your zero measurement.
11. Connect the other end of the 31-pin jumper into the UH of the STGC.
12. Start the Maxis and get the I/O monitor on display.
13. SET THE GAIN = 1.0. SET THE OFFSET = 0.0 in the STGC Tool Signals
table.
If you fail to do this step, your calibration will be off.
Figure 5-6: LEH-ST shop calibration setup
Quality Note
Do NOT load the LEH-ST with more than 8.0K lbs.
14. Power up the tool and let the transducer warm up for 10-15 minutes.
15. Make sure there is no tension or compression on the loadcell.
Private
If you bleed the hydraulic pump on the TDC off completely, the upper rope
socket support will come to rest on top of the loadcell, and place a slight
compressive force on the loadcell. This will affect your calibration. Make sure
that the hydraulic piston is in a position such that there is neither tension nor
compression on the loadcell.

16. Record the zero-load measurement on the LEH calibration chart, after
warm up.
17. Apply a load of 1,000 lbs to the loadcell, using the hydraulic hand pump.
18. Record the Downhole Force from the I/O Monitor on the LEH Calibration
Chart.
Repeat the measurements in 1,000 lbs. increments until an 8,000 lbs. load
is reached, and record that value.
19. Remove the load (bleed off the pressure) and check to make sure the
zero-reading is within one division of zero.
The Maxis Downhole Force should also have returned to its previous
zero-reading, within 25 lbs.
20. Calibrate only in the direction of increasing tension to minimize the effects
of hysteresis.
21. Fill in the Corrected Maxis DF column by adding the offset to each entry in
the previous column. Figure 5-7 shows an LEH calibration chart correctly
filled out.
L EH Ca li b r a ti on cha r t
Se t Ga i n t o 1 and Off s e t t o Z e r o be f o r e t ak i ng t he f o r ce m ea s u r e m en t
T DC r ead i n g Max i s DF
0 -70
1000 980
2000 1940
3000 2835
4000 3780
5000 4765
6000 5665
7000 6570
8000 7450
Offset = -1 x Maxis DF @ 0 lbs = +70 lbs
Gain = 8000 / (Maxis DF @ 8000 lbs - Maxis DF @ 0 lbs) = 8000 / (7450 - (-70)) = 1.063
Calibrated By:
Date:
Location:
LEH s/n:
Telemetry cartridge type and s/n:
Figure 5-7: LEH-ST Calibration Chart
Private
22. Once the calibration is complete, you will have to perform some easy
calculations to find the “Offset” and “Gain” for the LEH-ST.
Offset = -1 × (Maxis DF @ 0 lbs)
Gain = 8,000 / (Maxis DF @ 8000 lbs – Maxis DF @ 0 lbs).
Private
6-i Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Bridle Cable Connectors (BCC) 6-i
6 Bridle Cable Connectors (BCC)

Private
6-1 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Bridle Cable Connectors (BCC) 6-1
Bridle Cable Connectors (BCC)

6
LEH-ST
For BCC selection and assembly procedure, refer to BCC Selection and
Assembly SWI (InTouch content ID 6658523).
Private
7-i Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Cone Type Rope Socket Assembly 7-i
7 Cone Type Rope Socket Assembly

Private
7-1 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Cone Type Rope Socket Assembly 7-1
Cone Type Rope Socket Assembly

7
LEH-ST
Refer to the Rope Socket Assembly SWI 6440683 for the Rope Socket Data
Sheet (EH712104) and assembly instructions.
Table 7-1: Cable-Head Make-up and Auxiliary Hardware
EQCS-26, EQCS-41 Quick ChangeTorpedo

WDR
Cable Diameter Fishing Neck PEH/LEH Split Neoprene Split Steel
Cable Clamp
Type (in) Assembly Steel Cone Boot Rubber Boot Spring Boot Adapter for
Assy.
(one size only) Spring Boot
1-23, 2-23 0.233 100247507 H354497 No specific

H701841 H701913
1-25 0.257 100247506 H701572 adapter
1-32, 2-32 0.319 Not Available
2-32 HPC 0.320 H209345 100247505 H125569 H701912
7-32 AS 0.329
7-39
0.395 H209347 100247504 H125568
7-39 LXS
H701914
1
7-42 0.423 H701000
H350705 100247503 H350706
1-42 0.425
7-46 0.464 H209290 H106459

100247501 H121961 H222214
7-48 0.482
T5014142
4-51 0.505 No specific
7-52 0.520 100250322 101608481 H701911 adapter
H712029
7-53 0.526
1
H701000 Split Steel Boot for Spring Boot was only ever manufactured for .46 cable, but has ID of 0.484" +0.006"/-0.000". It will fit most 7-48 cables,
but nothing larger. It may also be used for smaller cables with appropriate sized boot, but will not be a snug fit.
Private
7-2 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Cone Type Rope Socket Assembly 7-2
TECH
__________
ALE RT
The flat area on top of fishing necks may cause a UPO. Fishing neck assemblies
have a flat area on the top that may cause the tools to get held up at surface
or downhole when entering into End of Tubing. This poses a high risk of UPO.
For additional details see Tech Alert #: 5238197 in the Heads Maintenance
Manual Tech Alert appendices.
__________________
Private
8-i Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Weakpoints 8-i
8 Weakpoints
8.1 General Description ____________________________________________ 8-1
8.2 Weakpoint Selection ___________________________________________ 8-4

8.3 Weakpoint Breaking Strength and Maximum Safe Pull __________ 8-6
8.4 Weakpoint Temperature Corrections ___________________________ 8-7
8.4.1 Flexible and Solid Weakpoint Temperature Correction __________ 8-7
8.4.2 Spider Weakpoint Temperature Correction _____________________ 8-8
8.5 Weakpoint Operations __________________________________________ 8-9
8.6 Weakpoint Maintenance ________________________________________ 8-9
Private
8-1 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Weakpoints 8-1
Weakpoints
8
LEH-ST
8.1 General Description

The weakpoint is an intentional weak link between the cable and the head. Its
purpose is to provide a means of pulling the cable off the logging tool should the
need arise. There are several different types of weakpoints for different heads,
but the purpose of all of them is the same; to be the first point of separation
under an increasing pull at the surface.
The heart of the weakpoint is a tightly toleranced, small diameter section of a

special heat-treated stainless steel alloy. The material is heat-treated to obtain
certain properties that make it fail under a tensile pull in a predictable manner.
This closely machined piece is then packaged in the rest of the weakpoint
assembly, which may include rubber coating (for corrosion protection), a cover
sleeve (to prevent damage by torque or bending), or mass-isolation in the case
of the bridle head.
There are three different weakpoint types in use in SWS heads:

• Solid
• Flexible, also known as cable weakpoints
• Electrically Released Devices known as ECRD or ERS (Details are not
covered in this manual. Refer to ECRD & ERS Reference Page (InTouch #
3296455) for more details.)
Private
Quality Note

The solid weakpoints are used for normal logging operations.
The "modular" weakpoint was developed to standardize and reduce the cost of
the weakpoint. It can be used in both the LEH and PEH heads. The modular
weakpoint has been incorporated into a small, easily replaceable package that is
relatively inexpensive to replace. Since the weakpoint is a disposable part, the
cost of the part thrown away is minimized. This is what the modular weakpoint
accomplishes. The modular weakpoint has been incorporated into production
LEH and PEH heads, and should be incorporated into every location's heads, for
the cost-saving benefit.
In addition, weakpoints come in two different ratings:

• Standard - for use up to 400 degF
• Hi-temp - for use in temperatures up to 500 degF.
The tensile material of standard and HT weakpoints is IDENTICAL. The

differences between standard and HT weakpoints are:
• HT weakpoints are bare metal.
• Standard weakpoints have a rubber coating on the metal.
The rubber covering on the standard weakpoints degrades with increasing

temperature and produces corrosive gases above 450 degF which can
deteriorate the tensile member, and can cause pitting on the metal. Therefore,
it is not used on hi-temp weakpoints. But below 400 degF, the rubber coating
Private
protects the standard weakpoint from well fluids, and allows the weakpoint to be
used for a longer period of time. The rubber material is made of Aflas or Tefzel.
Older weakpoints had neoprene coating on them, and they are now obsolete.
Occasionally, we set out to break the weakpoint, and break the cable instead.
Needless to say, this results in a time-consuming and difficult fishing job. This
can happen for several different reasons, including:
1. The cable, not the tool, is stuck downhole, so the weakpoint never sees
the increased tension.
2. The hole is deviated or dog-legged to such a degree that the increased pull
at the surface never makes it to the weakpoint, and the pull is taken by the
cable instead.
3. The cable is in such poor shape, either from wear or corrosion, that it breaks
much sooner than expected (before the weakpoint).
4. The weakpoint was chosen improperly, and too strong a weakpoint was
run in the head.
Other strange things can happen downhole that can affect how much tension the
weakpoint is seeing. It is best to have a downhole measurement of tension on
the weakpoint, provided by the LEHs with a loadcell, ACTS or HTCS. Of these,
only the LEHs with a loadcell provide a direct measurement of tension on the
weakpoint. The others measure tension pull on the tool string, provided the
tool is stuck at or below the tension-measuring sonde. If your head gets stuck
coming into a bridge (fairly common), neither the HTCS or ACTS will see the
increase in tension, even though it is being exerted directly on the weakpoint.
The result could be an unexpected pull-off.
Note
When the wellbore dynamics is expected to generate high gun shock loads, it
is recommended to contact Perforating Domain Champions and use the PURE
Job Planner software (InTouch # 3458697) which can predict gun shock loads
on completion tools in under balance jobs to optimize gun strings configuration
which can reduce Unintentional Pull Off risk. Also, consider to use the shock
absorbers to reduce the high gun shocks. For more details about the perforating
gun shock, refer to InTouch Announcement # 2023893.
All available weakpoints are listed in the Weakpoints section of the Volume II -
Appendix.
Private
8.2 Weakpoint Selection

The general rule is to use the strongest weakpoint available to pull a stuck tool
at TD without exceeding the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the Wireline cable
in use. The weakpoint must also be strong enough to carry the weight of the
tool string under normal logging operations. In some extreme cases, an ECRD
(Electrically Controlled Release Devices) or ERS (Electrical Release Sub) must
be considered in place of a standard mechanical weakpoint.
Select a cable (flexible) weakpoint in instances where high shock loading may
occur, such as heavy, HSD gun strings. Cable weakpoints are available for
PEH-AB and PEH-EF/ EFA heads. Always discuss difficult, special or critical
weakpoint selections with your manager, who will know of the local conditions. If
the calculation is borderline, it is better to choose toward the smaller weakpoint,
considering the difference between pulling off a tool and breaking a cable in
the well.
There are two methods for weakpoint selection:

• Standard Linear Equation Method
• Tool Planner Software Method
Per WL-QHSE-S03-WC, Refer to the Tension model in the Schlumberger Tool

Planner when choosing a weakpoint; this is essential for non-vertical wells.
Refer to Unintentional Pull-Off Prevention Technology-Based Training (InTouch #

4009311) for more details of weakpoint selection.
Spider weakpoint selection and Tool Planner Software Method are not covered
in this section. Refer to Unintentional Pull-off Prevention TBT (InTouch Content
4009311) for more details.
To decide which mechanical weakpoint to use, you will need to know some
parameters.
Table 8-1: Parameters for Weakpoint Selection
Name Short Name Unit Remarks

Total Depth of the well TD ft Provided by Client
Mud Weight MW lbm/gal Provided by Client
Weight of Tool in Air WTA lbs Refer to Tool
Specifications
Tool OD – – in Refer to Tool
Specifications
Private
Tool Length – – ft Refer to Tool

Specifications
Volume of Tool String VT Gallons (See the π x (Tool OD/2)2 x Tool
note below) Length
Weight of Tool in Mud WTM lbs WTA - (VT x MW)

Cable SWL – – lbs Refer to Cable
Specifications
Cable Weight – – lbs/Kft Refer to Cable
Specifications
Weight of Cable in Air WCA lbs Cable Weight x Cable
Length
Cable OD – – in Refer to Cable
Specifications
Cable Length – – Kft Refer to Cable
Specifications
Volume of Cable VC Gallons π x (Cable OD/2)2 x
Cable Length
Weight of Cable in Mud at TD WCM lbs WCA – (VC x MW)
Normal Tension at TD TN lbs WTM + WCM + Drag
while logging up
Note
• The volume of a 3-3/8 in OD tool will be approximately 0.5 gallons/ ft
• The volume of a 1-11/16 in OD tool will be approximately 0.125 gallons/ ft
Upper Weakpoint Rating can be calculated by the equations in .
Table 8-2: Upper and Lower Weakpoint Rating Selection

Upper Weakpoint Rating UWP lbs < (Cable SWL + WTM – TN) or <
(Cable SWL – WCM)
Lower Weakpoint Rating LWP lbs Refer to Weakpoint Range
Quality Note
Many examples include a cable buoyancy factor to compensate for weight lost
due to buoyancy (float). This buoyancy effect will be somewhat offset by friction
when the cable is moving uphole. This friction is difficult to predict and accurately
calculate. For these reasons, the cable buoyancy effect will not be used for
this exercise. The deletion of this effect is actually a slightly more conservative
Private
method of selecting a weak point. Please keep in mind, that in deep wells or
wells with heavy fluids, the cable buoyancy effect is considerable and must be
included. Tool Buoyancy is a considerable factor and will be considered later.
For this reason, the tool planner software must be used to select weakpoints.
Example: Select the weakpiont by the parameters as provided in Table 8-3.
Upper weakpoint rating < Cable SWL - WCM= Cable SWL - WCA * = 9,705 -
333 x 12= 9,705 - 3,996= 5,709 lbs.
Based on available Modular weakpoints per Table V-5, the largest weakpoint that
could be used for this job is the yellow weakpoint (4,800–5,400 lbf)
Table 8-3: Example of Parameters Required for Weakpoint Selection

Total Depth of the well TD ft 12,000
Mud Weight MW lbm/gal 10.3
Weight of Tool in Air WTA lbs 550
Tool OD – – ft 3-3/8 inch
Tool Length – – ft 46
Cable Type – – – – 7-46PXS
Cable SWL – – lbs 9,705
Cable Weight – – lbs/Kft 333
Head Type – – – – LEH-QC
Weakpoint Type – – – – Modular, Rigid
8.3 Weakpoint Breaking Strength and Maximum

Safe Pull
After the weakpoint is selected, the following three limits need to be calculated
before the job:
• Maximum Safe Pull that can be pulled without exceeding 75% of the
weakpoint lower rating.
• Maximum Weakpoint Breaking Strength to break weakpoint at TD.
• Minimum Weakpoint Breaking Strength to break weakpoint at TD.
Maximum Safe Pull, Maximum & Minimum Weakpoint Breaking Strength can
be calculated by the equations in the table below.
Private
Table 8-4: MSP, Maximum and Minimum Weakpoint Breaking Strength

Maximum Safe Pull MSP lbs 0.75 x LWP – WTM + TN or
0.75 x LWP + WCM
Maximum Weakpoint – – lbs UWP – WTM + TN or UWP

Breaking Strength + WCM
Minimum Weakpoint Breaking – – lbf LWP – WTM + TN or LWP +
Strength WCM
Taking the same example as in Table 8-3 (Yellow weakpoint, 4,800-5,400 lbf),
MSP = 0.75 x LWP + WCM = 0.75 x 4,800 + WCA * = 0.75 x 4,800 + 333 x
12 = 3,600 + 3,996= 7,596 lbs
Maximum Weakpoint Breaking Strength = UWP + WCM = UWP + WCA * = 5,400

+ 333 x 12 = 5,400 + 3,996= 9,396 lbs
Minimum Weakpoint Breaking Strength = LWP + WCM = UWP + WCA * = 4,800

+ 333 x 12 = 4,800 + 3,996= 8,796 lbs
Note
Many examples include a cable buoyancy factor to compensate for weight lost
due to buoyancy (float). This buoyancy effect will be somewhat offset by friction
when the cable is moving uphole. This friction is difficult to predict and accurately
calculate. For these reasons, the cable buoyancy effect will not be used for
this exercise. The deletion of this effect is actually a slightly more conservative
method of selecting a weak point. Please keep in mind, that in deep wells or
wells with heavy fluids, the cable buoyancy effect is considerable and must be
included. Tool Buoyancy is a considerable factor and will be considered later.
8.4 Weakpoint Temperature Corrections
8.4.1 Flexible and Solid Weakpoint Temperature

Correction
The strength of the weakpoint is temperature dependent. Weakpoints (both
standard and hi-temp ones) experience a reduction in strength with temperature.
The strength will be reduced by 4% per 100 degF (38 degC) increase in
temperature above 75 degF (24 degC). The reduction in strength at various
temperatures is listed in Table 8-5. Note that this temperature effect is not
Private
cumulative; that is, the weakpoint recovers its full strength when returned to
room temperature, so long as the weakpoint has not been pulled to more than
75% of its lower break strength
Table 8-5: Weakpoint Strength Reduction by Temperature
Bottom Hole Temperature Reduction

200 degF 5.4 %
300 degF 9.5 %
400 degF 13.7 %
500 degF 16.4 %
600 degF 20.4 %
Figure 8-1: Weakpoint rating reduction due to temperature
8.4.2 Spider Weakpoint Temperature Correction

Spider Weakpoint strength should be corrected for temperature effect in the
same manner as solid and flexible weakpoints. Table 8-5can be used for all
steel armor cables (GIPS/ XS/ XXS) other than HC265 and MP35N alloy armor
cables. HC265 and MP35N alloy armor cables do not have an empirical dataset
from which temperature corrections may be determined for spider weakpoints.
Private
8.5 Weakpoint Operations

1. Never go in the hole without knowing, FOR CERTAIN, what weakpoint is
installed in your head. When you are stuck downhole is no time to wonder
what weakpoint you have installed in the head.
2. DO NOT PULL OVER 75% of the lower weakpoint rating, unless pulling off
is acceptable to the client.
3. Be aware that the strength of weakpoints is temperature dependent.
The strength will be reduced by 4% per 100 degF (38 degC) increase in
temperature above 75 degF (24 degC). So, a weakpoint's strength at 475
degF (246 degC) will be reduced by 16%. This temperature effect is not
cumulative; that is, the weakpoint recovers its full strength when returned
to room temperature
4. Be aware that your tension-measuring device is not 100% accurate. Your
cable weight calculation will have some error, as will your tool weight in mud
number. These sources of error are the reason for the 75% of weakpoint
rating pull restriction. Any time you exceed 75%, you could be in danger of
pulling off, due to these error sources.
5. Use a downhole measurement of tension (LEHs with a loadcell, ACTS,
HTCS) in sticky or deviated holes to determine more accurately what you
are pulling on the weakpoint.
6. Remember the limitations of the ACTS and HTCS, if it is the head that is
stuck. These tools will not see the tension increase, but the weakpoint will.
7. In addition, several over-pulls during previous jobs can have an effect on the
weakpoint strength too (both standard and HT weakpoints alike). Also, if the
head is jerked or tension is applied too fast, it can cause a premature failure.
8.6 Weakpoint Maintenance

All weakpoints must be replaced as part of TRIM or SLS-1 as defined in RITE.
Different heads may have different trigger.
When performing explosive severing/cutting operations a new flexible weakpoint

must be installed in the head prior to running in hole. The flexible weakpoint
must be replaced after one (1) severing/cutting job.
Private
Quality Note
All flexible weakpoints subjected to one (1) explosive severing/cutting job must
be junked.
If any of the items below occurs, the weakpoint must be changed out immediately:
1. Change out any weakpoint that has been pulled more than 75% of its lower
break strength.
2. Change out any weakpoint that has been exposed to temperatures higher
than its rated temperature.
3. Change out any weakpoint that has been exposed to freezing conditions in a
head with no grease.
4. Change out any weakpoint that is even marginally longer than a normal
weakpoint. This means the weakpoint has yielded, due to a pull or shock
load, and may fail at any time.
5. Change out any weakpoint that is bent, even slightly.
6. Change out any weakpoint if the head history / weakpoint history is unknown.
7. Change out any weakpoint that has signs of corrosion (pitting / blackened
areas after being washed).
8. Solid and flexible weakpoints are not H2S or acid resistant; therefore, they
must not be used in H2S or acid environments.
9. Any weakpoint exposed to high chlorides requires replacement after every
job.
Any weakpoint inadvertently exposed to H2S or acid environment requires
replacement immediately.
TECH
___________
ALE RT
Corrosion on the weakpoint caused unintentional pull off.

The solid weakpoints being used in the field are made from 17-4 stainless steel.
While this material is not susceptible to rusting like carbon steels, it is highly
susceptible to oxygen pitting corrosion when exposed to brine solutions. There
have been two recent UPOs where the weakpoints broke below specification
due to corrosion. The figure below shows a weakpoint from an LEH head that
failed. Notice the blackened areas on the surface of the weakpoint near the
break. These are the pits caused by chloride attack.
Private
HCS Sustaining Engineering\Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo\InTouch Content ID 3012542\4.0\Release Date:23-Mar-2018\EDMS UID: 275261732\Produced: 23-Mar-2018 04:07:36 8-11 Heads ORM and MM Volume I / Weakpoints 8-11
Figure 8-2: Broken weakpoint
For additional details, see Tech Alert #: 5108748 in the Tech Alert appendices.
___________________
Private

Puntos Debiles Actualizados 25 Junio2018

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Puntos Debiles Actualizados 25 Junio2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Heads Operation and

Maintenance Manual, Volume I

EDMS UID: 275261732

Produced: 23-Mar-2018 04:07:36

Copyright © 2018 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2018 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Trademarks & Service marks

Schlumberger, the Schlumberger logotype, and other words or symbols used

A complete list of Schlumberger marks may be viewed at the Schlumberger

Author: Kevin Zanca, Hai Vo

Reviewer: Brian Philpott

Approver: Mike Ramsey

Version Date Description Prepared by

InTouch content # 6588887 for assembly and

2.0 28-Dec-2011 General Revision. Author: Brian Philpott

Version Date Description Prepared by

to remove cables E057566 and H142548.

1.7 28-Mar-2008 Correct typo in Section 6.1. Clariﬁed the Author:

1.3 27-Nov-2006 Remove reference to obsoleted equipment Author: Wireline InTouch

Regulatory Compliance __________________________________________ vi

Forward _________________________________________________________ vii

1 Introduction ___________________________________________________ 1-1

2 Health, Safety & Environment __________________________________ 2-1

3 General Descriptions and Speciﬁcations _______________________ 3-1

4 Operations, Disassembly and Assembly _______________________ 4-1

4.25 Fishing ____________________________________________________ 4-135

5 Maintenance ___________________________________________________ 5-1

5.2 O-ring Practices _____________________________________________ 5-2

6 Bridle Cable Connectors (BCC) _________________________________ 6-1

7 Cone Type Rope Socket Assembly _____________________________ 7-1

8 Weakpoints ____________________________________________________ 8-1

3-1 MH-22 - H030796 _________________________________________________ 3-4

4-34 Installing the feed-thru (T5011962)_________________________________ 4-75

3-1 Monocable Heads and Kits Speciﬁcations ___________________________ 3-2

4-24 LEH-PT Troubleshooting __________________________________________ 4-89

5-16 TRIM-1 Mechanical – LEHs _______________________________________ 5-24

7-1 Cable-Head Make-up and Auxiliary Hardware _______________________ 7-1

Copyright © 2018 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

The General Descriptions & Speciﬁcation, Operation, Disassembly and Assembly

2 Health, Safety & Environment

2.2 Equipment Safety ______________________________________________ 2-1

Health, Safety & Environment

2.1 Personnel Safety

2.2 Equipment Safety

Additional cautions for heads with a mud temperature sensor (RTD) -

2.3 Compliance with European Union Technical

2.3.2 Identiﬁed Risk

2.3.3 Safety Guidelines

• E082699: elec. insulation gloves, class 0, 1,000V size 8

• E082705: cover gloves (mechanical risk), size 10

3 General Descriptions and Speciﬁcations

3.1.1 Monocable Heads Speciﬁcations ______________________________ 3-2

3.3.8.1 Using Coil Spring Boots in LEH-QE _______________________ 3-38

3.3.11 LEH-RC ____________________________________________________ 3-41

General Descriptions and

The proper maintenance is vital to make heads function well.

3.1 Monocable Heads

MH-22 is obsolete and MH-32 is the standard monocable head.

Monocable heads can be converted to conﬁgurations with bigger head OD using

Monocable heads can be upgraded for HTHP operations by the parts as

3.1.1 Monocable Heads Speciﬁcations

If an LEH or a XHUH is required for tractor operations involving explosive

Table 3-1: Monocable Heads and Kits Speciﬁcations

Name MH-221 MH-32 AH-38